484421

Volvo V40 - 2013 Handleiding

403
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/410
Pagina verder
Owners Manual L:7:9>I>DC
V40
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-
nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment....................... 10
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 14
Airbags...................................................... 17
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 20
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 22
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 24
WHIPS ...................................................... 25
When the systems deploy ........................ 27
Safety mode.............................................. 28
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)...... 29
Child safety............................................... 31
02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 42
Battery replacement, remote control key/
PCC*......................................................... 48
Keyless*.................................................... 50
Locking/unlocking..................................... 54
Child safety locks...................................... 60
Alarm*....................................................... 61
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
03
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 66
Volvo Sensus ........................................... 77
Key positions............................................ 79
Seats......................................................... 81
Steering wheel.......................................... 86
Lighting..................................................... 87
Wipers and washing.................................. 99
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 102
Compass*............................................... 107
Alcolock*................................................. 108
Starting the engine.................................. 112
Starting the engine – external battery..... 114
Gearboxes............................................... 115
Eco Guide & Power*................................ 121
Start/Stop *............................................. 123
Foot brake............................................... 129
Parking brake.......................................... 131
HomeLink
*............................................ 132
04
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-
tem.......................................................... 138
Road sign information - RSI*.................. 141
Speed limiter*.......................................... 143
Cruise control*........................................ 145
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 147
Distance Warning*.................................. 158
City Safety™........................................... 161
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection*............................. 167
Driver Alert System*................................ 175
Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 176
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid* 180
Park assist syst*...................................... 184
Park assist camera*................................ 187
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*.......................... 190
BLIS and CTA*........................................ 194
05
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 200
Menu source MY CAR............................ 203
Climate control........................................ 212
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-
senger compartment heater*.................. 223
Additional heater*.................................... 227
Trip computer......................................... 229
Adapting driving characteristics............. 233
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment........................................................ 234
Table of contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment...... 240
Radio....................................................... 250
Media player........................................... 257
External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................ 261
Media Bluetooth
* ................................. 264
Bluetooth
handsfree*............................ 267
Voice recognition* mobile phone............ 275
TV*........................................................... 279
Remote control* ..................................... 282
07
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 286
Refuelling................................................ 289
Fuel......................................................... 291
Loading................................................... 294
Cargo area.............................................. 297
Driving with a trailer................................ 299
Towing and recovery.............................. 305
08
08 Wheels and tyres
General ................................................... 310
Changing wheels ................................... 314
Tyre pressure ......................................... 318
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 319
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........ 320
Table of contents
5
09
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment............................... 328
Lamps..................................................... 335
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 341
Battery..................................................... 344
Fuses...................................................... 348
Car care.................................................. 357
10
10 Specifications
Type designations................................... 366
Dimensions and weights......................... 368
Engine specifications.............................. 371
Engine oil................................................ 372
Fluids and lubricants............................... 374
Fuel......................................................... 376
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-
sure ........................................................ 378
Electrical system..................................... 379
Type approval......................................... 380
Symbols in the display............................ 392
11
11 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 396
Introduction
Important information
6
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equip-
ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-
ferent equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
7
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
location in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car is available on
the respective decals for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Introduction
Important information
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
To be continued
`
``
This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
ality. Some of the computers can record infor-
mation during normal driving if they detect an
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
event of a collision or incident. Parts of the
recorded information are required so that tech-
nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and
other regulations. In addition to this, the infor-
mation is used for research purposes by Volvo
in order to continually develop quality and
safety, as the information can contribute to a
better understanding of the factors that cause
accidents and injuries. The information
includes details of the status and functionality
of various systems and modules in the vehicle
with regard to engine, throttle, steering and
brake systems, amongst other things. This
information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-
cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a result
of a collision or incident. This information may
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to
further develop and further enhance safety and
quality and as long as there are legal require-
ments and other regulations that Volvo needs
to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
bed information being disclosed to third parties
without the vehicle owner's consent. However,
due to national legislation and regulations
Volvo may be required to disclose such infor-
mation to authorities such as police authorities,
or others who may assert a legal right to have
access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information
recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and main-
tenance, is stored and handled in a secure
manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further infor-
mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort serv-
ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a
change of owner, it is very important that these
services are discontinued so that the former
owner cannot access the services in the car.
Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the
security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo
On Call.
Introduction
Important information
9
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
To be able to read the QR code, you need a QR
code reader, which is available as an add-on
for a number of mobile phones. A QR code
reader can be downloaded from the App Store
or Android Market.
QR code
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Drive economically - think ahead.
•
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and War-
ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine rea-
ches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
•
High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-
tance 4 times.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 286 and
376.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an envi-
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship Council
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSC
certified forests or other
controlled sources.
12
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 14
Airbags.................................................................................................... 17
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 20
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 22
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 24
WHIPS .................................................................................................... 25
When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 27
Safety mode............................................................................................ 28
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag).................................................... 29
Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
14
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press-
ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A
loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and
move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits
into the intended seatbelt buckle.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does
not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the car leans heavily.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
15
Make sure that you:
•
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
•
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
•
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
•
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
of the seatbelt's protective properties may
have been lost even if the seatbelt does not
appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be
replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam-
age. The new seatbelt must be type-
approved and designed for installation at
the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G020998
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In
addition, check that there are no twists in the
seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between abdomen and steering wheel.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
16
Seatbelt reminder
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after press-
ing the indicator stalk's OK button.
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by press-
ing the OK button.
The information display, see page 69, shows
which seatbelts are in use. This information is
always available.
Seatbelt tensioner
The seatbelts on the driver’s side, the passen-
ger side and at the outer rear seats are fitted
with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the
seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the
event of a sufficiently violent collision. The
seatbelt then provides more effective restraint
for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not func-
tion as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
17
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
Analogue combined instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel
1
illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is in key position II. The symbol clears
after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag
system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indi-
cates a fault in the airbag system, the belt
tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropri-
ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and
SRS
airbag Service required
or SRS airbag
Service urgent
appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G018665
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive
car.
G018666
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-
drive car.
1
See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
18
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot.
To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver and passen-
ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
Individual airbags are also adapted to the
collision force to which the vehicle is sub-
jected.
Airbags on the driver's side
The car has two airbags to supplement the
protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driv-
er's side. One of the airbags is folded up in the
centre of the steering wheel (see the illustration
on page 17); the steering wheel is labelled
AIRBAG.
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand-
drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the
lower part of the instrument panel on the driv-
er's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the air-
bags in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
hand drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-
hand drive car.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
19
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the air-
bag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
20
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con-
trol key's key blade be used to change posi-
tion.
For information on the key blade, see
page 46.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch
(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the
airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the message in the roof con-
sole (see page 21) indicates that the air-
bag is deactivated and if the warning sym-
bol for the airbag system is also displayed
in the combined instrument panel. This indi-
cates that there has been a severe malfunc-
tion. Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Activating/deactivating
Position of airbag label plus switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key posi-
tion II the warning symbol for the airbag is
displayed on the combined instrument
panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 17).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions for the remote control key, see
page 79.
Activated airbag
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the
roof console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is activated (see preced-
ing illustration).
Deactivated airbag
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-
tration).
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
22
Side airbag
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat back-
rests.
WARNING
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-
belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated
1
passenger air-
bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
23
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
01
24
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the windows in the doors.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
25
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
26
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
27
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
A
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
overturning
Airbags
(Steering wheel air-
bag, knee airbag,
passenger airbag)
In a frontal collision
B
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact
accident
B
System Triggered
Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a side
impact and/or over-
turning and/or some
frontal collisions
B
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
In a rear-end colli-
sion
A
There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat.
B
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-
lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liq-
uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags
may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec-
ommends that you have it conveyed to an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode
01
28
Driving after a collision
Warning symbol in the analogue combined instru-
ment panel
1
.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start
button. Then close the door and reinsert the
remote control key. The car's electronics will
now try to reset themselves to normal mode.
Then try to start the car.
If the message
Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv-
ice used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual
has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after
Safety
mode See manual
has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is dis-
played. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor-
ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
1
See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel.
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
01
29
Properties
The airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under
the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event of
a frontal collision with a pedestrian, the sensors
in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates
if required based on the force of the impact.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
20-50 km/h and an ambient temperature
between -20 and +70°C.
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag):
•
the rear part of the bonnet is raised and
locked in this position
•
the brake system is prepared for the
upcoming emergency braking.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any-
thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at
the front may cause incorrect function in the
system and lead to serious injury and dam-
age to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms
are used and that you only use genuine
parts for them.
Handling after activation
If any of the other airbags in the passenger
compartment were activated, the car remains
in safety mode, see page 28.
If only the pedestrian airbag was activated:
1. Move the car to a safe location as close as
possible.
2. Fold the airbag following the instructions
under the next heading "Folding the airbag
(Pedestrian Airbag)".
3. Seek the nearest workshop.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that, after activation of
the airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop as soon as possible.
Folding the airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Airbag housing
Velcro strap, passenger side
Velcro strap, driver's side
The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke.
This is normal. Fold the airbag as follows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the
driver's side (4).
2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length on
the driver's side. Then fold the gathered
fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro
strap (double sided) around as much fabric
as possible and fasten it.
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
01
30
3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag
into the airbag housing (2).
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the passenger side. It
may be necessary to fold the gathered fab-
ric twice on this side in order to wind the
Velcro strap around it.
5. The airbag housing cover will be open
slightly. This is completely normal.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
31
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as pos-
sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 32.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Vol-
vo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G020739
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-
senger seat, provided the passenger air-
bag is not activated
1
.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If
a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
The label becomes visible when the passenger
door is opened; see the illustration on page 20.
Recommended child seats
2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 04301146
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
2
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
33
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
34
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
35
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 60.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are located at the lower section of the rear seat
backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
Size
class
Description
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger seat
if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
36
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
37
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X
OK
A
(IUF)
B1 X
OK
A
(IUF)
A X
OK
A
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
38
Upper mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the rear
of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with
folding head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head restraint
leg before they are tensioned at the attach-
ment point.
01 Safety
01
39
40
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 42
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 48
Keyless*.................................................................................................. 50
Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 54
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 60
Alarm*...................................................................................................... 61
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
42
General
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys
or two remote control keys with keyless func-
tion. They are used to start the car and for lock-
ing and unlocking.
The remote control key contains a removable
key blade made of metal. The visible section is
available in two versions so that it is possible
to distinguish between the remote control
keys.
Additional remote control keys can be ordered
- up to 6 can be programmed and used for the
same car.
There are four remote control key variants:
•
Remote control key, standard
1
•
Remote control key with Keyless start
1
•
Remote control key with Keyless drive
1
•
PCC with Keyless drive
2
For information on remote control key function
buttons see page 44.
PCC plus remote control key with keyless func-
tion has extended functionality compared to
the standard remote control key. The rest of
this chapter describes functions available in all
variants.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain-
ing remote control keys must then be taken to
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
control key must be erased from the system as
a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR under Information
Number of keys.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203.
Key memory
3
- door mirrors, driver’s
seat and steering force
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see pages
82, 104 and 233.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203.
For remote control keys with keyless function,
see page 50.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded
4
in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
rors are folded
4
out.
1
5-button key
2
6-button key
3
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
4
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
43
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
When locking, indication is given only if all
locks have been locked and all doors are
closed. Indication is given when the last door
has been closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/unlock-
ing with light can be set in the car's menu sys-
tem, see page 203.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Settings
Car settings Light settings
and select
Door lock confirmation light and/
or
Unlock confirmation light.
Lock indicator
Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 61.
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are rela-
ted to the electronic immobiliser:
Message Specification
Insert car key
Error when reading
the remote control
key during starting -
Remove the key
from the ignition
switch, press it in
again and make a
new start attempt.
Car key not found
(Applicable only to
cars with Keyless.)
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting - Try
to start again.
If the error persists:
Insert the remote
control key into the
ignition switch and
try to start again.
Immobiliser Try to
start again
Error in immobiliser
system during star-
ting. If the error per-
sists: Contact a
workshop - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
For starting the car, see page 112.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
44
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Functions
5-button remote control key
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all
windows simultaneously.
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote con-
trol key, check that nobody's hands are
trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail-
gate while the alarm is deactivated.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all
windows simultaneously.
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv-
er's door only with one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu sys-
tem MY CAR under Settings
Car settings
Lock settings Doors unlock with both
the alternatives
All doors and Driver door,
then all
. For a description of the menu system,
see page 203.
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more
information, see page 95.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only. For more information, see
page 56.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti-
vate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
45
Range
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked with
the key blade, see page 47.
Unique PCC functions*
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indica-
tor lamps.
Using the information button
–
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
mately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is inter-
rupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi-
nates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has trav-
elled around on the PCC), contact a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord-
ance with the following illustration:
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
46
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
cator lamps – The alarm was triggered less
than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other
functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, build-
ings, topographical conditions, etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light trav-
elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi-
nates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has trav-
elled around on the PCC), contact a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key, see
page 51.
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 60.
•
the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the
event of power failure, see page 54.
•
The glovebox lock* opens see page 56.
•
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 20.
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
47
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened as follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
See also the illustration and further infor-
mation, see page 51.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see
page 51.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
48
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing the battery
The batteries should be replaced if:
•
the information symbol is illuminated and
the display shows
Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
Remote control key with 1 battery
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2.
Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Remote control key and PCC* with 2
batteries
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2.
First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with
the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system*
General
Below is a description of remote control keys
with Keyless drive and Keyless start functions.
For cars with a Keyless start function, the car
can be started without the remote control key
being inserted in the ignition lock. For cars with
a Keyless drive function, the car can be locked
and unlocked without pressing a button on the
remote control key, and also be started without
the key being inserted in the ignition lock. The
system makes it easier and more convenient to
open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
Both of the car's remote control keys have
Keyless function. It is possible to order more
remote control keys, see page 42.
The car's electrical system can be set to 3 dif-
ferent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with
the remote control key, see page 79.
Remote control key range
1
In order to open a door or the tailgate without
pressing a button on the remote control key, a
remote control key must be approx. 1.5 m from
the car door handle or tailgate. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the remote control key with him or
her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door
if the remote control key is on the opposite side
of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-
cate the range covered by the system's anten-
nas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position
I or II is active (see page 79) and a door has
been opened and then closed, the information
display shows a warning message while
sounding an audible reminder at the same
time.
When the remote control key has been
returned to the car, the warning message goes
off and the audible reminder ceases once
either/or:
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
the remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition lock
•
The OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
Safe operation of the remote control key
with keyless function
If a remote control key with keyless function is
left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily
when the car is locked. This prevents unau-
thorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car and
finds the remote control key, it is reactivated. It
is therefore important to handle all remote con-
trol keys with great care.
IMPORTANT
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the Keyless function.
1
Does not apply to cars with keyless start
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key
with keyless function near a mobile phone
or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and the key blade like a
traditional remote control key, see page 44.
Locking
2
Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a touch-
sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and
a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubber-
ised pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping
one of the door handles or pressing the smaller
of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the
lock indicator in the windscreen confirms that
locking has been completed by starting to
flash, see page 43.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P posi-
tion; otherwise the car can be neither locked
nor alarmed.
Unlocking
2
Unlocking with Keyless-drive takes place when
a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's
rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open
the door or tailgate as normal.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with thick
gloves on or after a very quick hand move-
ment a second attempt may be required, or
with the glove taken off.
Unlocking with the key blade
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened using the remote control key's
removable key blade (see page 46).
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically
by means of the torque when the blade
2
Not applicable to remote control keys with keyless start
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
52
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
is pushed straight up and into the open-
ing.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin-
der and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the front left door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 61.
Key memory
3
- driver’s seat, door
mirrors and steering force
Memory function in remote control key
with keyless function
If several people each with a remote control
key approach the car, then the settings for seat
and mirrors are implemented for the person
who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with remote control key A, but person
B with remote control key B is to drive, the set-
tings can be changed as follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their remote control key's unlock
button, see page 44.
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 82.
•
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 82 and 104.
•
Adjust steering force in the MY CAR menu
system; see see page 205.
Lock settings
The Keyless-drive function can be adapted by
indicating in the menu system MY CAR which
doors are to be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there
select between
All doors unlock, Any door,
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203.
Antenna location
The Keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
3
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
WARNING
People who have had a pacemaker opera-
tion should not come closer than 22 cm to
the Keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the Keyless
system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
54
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
From the outside
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Dif-
ferent sequences for unlocking can be
selected, see "Unlocking with the remote con-
trol key" page 44.
In order that the lock sequence can be acti-
vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any
of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then
it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated
only when it/they are closed. With the Key-
less* system all the doors and tailgate must be
closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see
page 46.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked
with the key blade - the alarm is switched
off when the remote control key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not pos-
sible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more infor-
mation, see page 58, Deadlocks.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 61.)
Manual locking
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see page 51.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door
which must be depressed using the key blade
- they are then mechanically locked/blocked to
prevent them being opened from outside. The
doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks, see page 60.
– Remove the removable key blade from the
remote control key, see page 46. Insert the
key blade into the hole for the lock switch
and press in the key until it reaches the
bottom, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the
inner door handle must be opened.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
NOTE
•
A door's lock reset only locks that par-
ticular door - not all doors simultane-
ously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock can-
not be opened from either the outside
or the inside, see page 60. A rear door
that is locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key or
central locking button.
From the inside
Central locking
Central locking.
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on the driver's door.
•
Press one side of the button to lock -
the other side
to unlock.
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants - the
lamp in the central locking button for the driv-
er's door has different meanings dependent on
the variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's
door, other doors have no button:
•
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
With central locking button on both front doors
and electric lock button in each rear door:
•
Illuminated lamp means that only that par-
ticular door is locked. When all buttons are
illuminated all doors are locked.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
•
Press the central locking button .
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
•
Pull the door handle and open the door -
the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Locking
•
Both front doors must be closed for the
central locking to be activated. Press the
central locking button
- all doors are
locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it
will lock when it is closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows simultaneously.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win-
dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. For a description of the menu
system, see page 203.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lock cylinder, glovebox*
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. For information on the key blade, see
page 46.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
Tailgate
Manual opening
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the outer
handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key's
button.
The lock indicator on the instrument panel
stops flashing in order to show that not all of
the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
movement sensors and the sensors for open-
ing the tailgate are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate can be opened in two different
ways using the remote control key:
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and lift
the boot lid. If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is
re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and the
lock is disengaged at which the boot lid opens
about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to
open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could however
prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the
lock.
NOTE
•
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked
with 2 presses or from the car interior,
automatic relocking does not take place
because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it
must be closed manually.
•
After the boot lid/tailgate has been
closed it is unlocked and the alarm is
not armed - relock it and re-arm the
alarm with the remote control key's lock
button
.
Opening the car from inside
To open the tailgate:
– Press the lighting panel button.
> The lock releases and the tailgate opens
by a few centimetres.
Locking with the remote control key
– Press the remote control key's button for
locking,
, see page 44.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that
the car is locked and the alarm* has
been activated.
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is unlocked using the remote
control key
button. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked until the car is locked with
the remote control key
button. If the car is
locked during travel or with the interior buttons,
the fuel filler flap will remain unlocked.
The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows the
locking or unlocking of the keyless-drive and
the central locking system. Fuel filler flap lock-
ing always occurs after a 10-minute delay.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
58
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deadlocks*
1
Deadlocks means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The front left
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1.
Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings
Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 203).
2.
Select
Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the
message
Reduced guard See
manual
and the deadlocks function is
switched off when the car is locked.
or
–
Select
Ask when exiting.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
centre console display screen shows
the message
Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again?
fol-
lowed by the alternatives
Confirm with
OK
and Cancel with EXIT.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
–
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detec-
tors* are switched off at the same time, see
page 61.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru-
ment panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors are re-engaged.
1
Only in combination with alarm.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
59
If the locking system shall not be changed
–
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual blocking of the rear doors
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
With child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with
manual door locks, see page 54.
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
– Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob - see page 46.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
Control panel driver's door.
The child safety locks can be activated/deac-
tivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see
page 79. Activation/deactivation can be per-
formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows the mes-
sage
Rear child lock activated and
the button's lamp illuminates - the locks
are active.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driv-
er's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
•
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-
mation display shows a message. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
if the car is left with a window open or if the
passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window when leav-
ing the car. If the car's integrated passenger
compartment heater (or a portable electric
heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
upwards in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
ance.
Alarm indicator
Same LED as lock indicator, see page 43.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key posi-
tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-
gered.
Arming the alarm
– Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
– Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Automatic alarm activation
In certain countries, the alarm is activated after
a certain delay if the driver's door was opened
and closed but the car was not re-locked.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
62
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis-
armed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the left-hand front door with the
detachable key blade - see page 51.
> The alarm is triggered, the direction indi-
cators flash and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily
deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo-
rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 58.
02 Locks and alarm
02
63
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 66
Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 77
Key positions.......................................................................................... 79
Seats....................................................................................................... 81
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 86
Lighting................................................................................................... 87
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 99
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 102
Compass*.............................................................................................. 107
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 108
Starting the engine................................................................................ 112
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 114
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 115
Eco Guide & Power*.............................................................................. 121
Start/Stop *........................................................................................... 123
Foot brake............................................................................................. 129
Parking brake........................................................................................ 131
HomeLink
*.......................................................................................... 132
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
66
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Function Page
Menus and mes-
sages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
87, 93, 200,
229
Cruise control 145, 147
Horn, airbags 18, 86
Combined instru-
ment panel
69, 75
Menu, audio and
phone control
203, 241, 267,
243
START/STOP
ENGINE button
112
Ignition switch 79
Display for infotain-
ment and menus
203, 241, 241
Door handle –
Control panel 55, 60, 102,
104
Hazard warning
flashers
92
Function Page
Control for infotain-
ment and menu
control
203, 241, 243
Control panel for
climate control
215
Gear selector 115
Parking brake 131
Wipers and wash-
ing
99, 100
Steering wheel
adjustment
86
Bonnet opener 328
Light switch,
opener for tailgate
56, 87
Seat adjustment* 82
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
68
Right-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
Function Page
Wipers and wash-
ing
99, 100
Menu, audio and
phone control
203, 241, 267,
243
Horn, airbags 17, 86
Combined instru-
ment panel
69, 75
Cruise control 145, 147
START/STOP
ENGINE button
112
Ignition switch 79
Display for infotain-
ment and menus
203, 241, 241
Door handle –
Control panel 55, 60, 102,
104
Hazard warning
flashers
92
Control for infotain-
ment and menu
control
203, 241, 243
Function Page
Control panel for
climate control
215
Gear selector 115
Parking brake 131
Menus and mes-
sages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
87, 93, 200,
229
Steering wheel
adjustment
86
Bonnet opener 328
Light switch and
tailgate opener
56, 87
Seat adjustment* 82
Information displays
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
Information displays, digital instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information
displays show information on some of the car's
functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
70
and messages. The information is shown with
text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the information displays.
Gauges and indicators, analogue
instrument panel
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
229, and Refuelling, page 289.
EcoGuide. See also page 121.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator
1
/ Gear position indi-
cator
2
. See also page 286.
Gauges and indicators, digital
instrument panel
Various themes can be selected for the digital
combined instrument panel Possible themes
are Elegance, Eco and Performance.
To change to a different theme, press the left
stalk switch's OK button and then select the
Themes menu option by turning the thumb-
wheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by
pressing the OK button. For more information
on menus, see page 200.
Meters and indicators, Elegance.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
229, and Refuelling, page 289.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator
3
/ Gear position indi-
cator
4
. See also page 286.
1
Manual gearbox
2
Automatic gearbox
3
Manual gearbox
4
Automatic gearbox
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
71
Meters and indicators, Eco.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
229, and Refuelling, page 289.
EcoGuide. See also page 121.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator
3
/ Gear position indi-
cator
4
. See also page 286.
Meters and indicators, Performance.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
229, and Refuelling, page 289.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
PowerMeter. See also page 121.
Gearchange indicator
3
/ Gear position indi-
cator
4
. See also page 286.
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru-
ment panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols
5
3
Manual gearbox
4
Automatic gearbox
5
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 329.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
72
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
5
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake sym-
bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-
engaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Stability system, sport mode
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
Symbol Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
DRIVe - Start/Stop, the engine
auto-stopped, see page 123
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system con-
tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
5
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 329.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
73
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on. The rear fog lamp is made up of two
bulbs.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Stability system, Sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
ments and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled skid-
ding of the rear section up to a certain level
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-
ing. Preheating mostly takes place due to low
temperature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
tion display. The message text is cleared with
the OK button, see page 200, or it disappears
automatically after a time (time depending on
which function is indicated). The information
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-
bol and message are cleared using the OK
button, or disappear automatically after a
time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
DRIVe – Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is auto-
stopped.
Warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure
A
Parking brake
applied
Parking brake
applied, alternative
symbol
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not
charging
Fault in brake sys-
tem
Warning
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
329 and 331.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
74
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
is illuminated during application. For more
information, see page 131.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 333.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 333. If the brake fluid level is nor-
mal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
a workshop to have the brake system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end
will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-
atory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the OK button,
see page 200. The warning symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the OK button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet
6
or tailgate is not
closed properly then the information or warn-
ing symbol illuminates together with an explan-
atory text message in the combined instrument
panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid,
whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
Trip meter.
Display for trip meter
7
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
measuring short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter.
One long press (more than 1 second) on the left
stalk switch RESET button resets the trip
meter currently displayed. A longer press (4
seconds) resets the trip computer if the car is
fitted with a digital instrument panel. For more
information, see page 229.
Clock
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time
8
Set the clock
The clock can be set in the menu group MY
CAR, for more information see page 203.
6
Only cars with alarm*.
7
The appearance of the display may vary depending on variant.
8
The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
76
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
RSI*
The function RSI (Road Sign Identification)
helps the driver to see road signs containing
information on current speed, that a motorway
or road is starting/ending and when overtaking
is prohibited. For detailed information on RSI,
see page 141.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
"Combined Instrument Panel Software:
Portions of this software are copyright 2.4.3
The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All
rights reserved."
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
General
Control panel in centre console
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's
manual (Road and Traffic Information Sys-
tem - RTI).
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see
page 241.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 203.
Climate control, see page 212.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see
page 187.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the
heart of your personal Volvo experience. Volvo
Sensus combines and presents many func-
tions in several of the car's systems on the
centre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus
the car can be personalised by means of an
intuitive user interface. Settings can be made
in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting
the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function:
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other
sources, systems and functions can be acti-
vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue-
tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information on all functions/systems,
see the respective section in the owner's man-
ual.
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved. (c) UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions are
derived from material licensed to the University
of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. Neither the
name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names
of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
03
78
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright
notice including the dates of first publication
and either this permission notice or a reference
to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as
contained in this notice, the name of Silicon
Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
Insert and remove the remote control
key
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the ignition
switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket.
For more information on Keyless functions -
see page 50.
Insert the key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the key
in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end
position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 46.
Withdraw the key
•
Push the remote control key, allow it to
eject, then pull it out from the ignition
switch.
Functions at different levels
In order to enable the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
manual these levels are described using the
denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions avail-
able in each key position/level.
Level Functions
0
Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminated.
Power seats can be adjusted.
The audio system can be used for
a limited time - see page 240.
I
Sun visor for glass roof, power
windows, 12 V socket in the pas-
senger compartment, RTI, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
II
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illumi-
nate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after the
engine has been started.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
avoided!
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Choosing key position/level
Key position 0
•
Unlock the car - this means that the car's
electrical system is at level 0.
Key position I
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch
1
- Briefly press
START/STOP ENGINE.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
Key position II
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch
1
- Give a long
2
press
on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
•
To return to key position 0 from position II
and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's func-
tions with remote control key removed - see
page 240.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the
engine - see page 112.
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing - see page 305.
1
Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.
2
Approx. 2 seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
Front seats
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the
wheel
1
.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat cush-
ion*, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving. Make
sure that the seat is in locked position in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Adjusting front seat head restraints
The height of the front seat head restraints can be
adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint based on the person's
height so that the whole of the back of the head
is covered if possible.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustration)
must be pressed while the restraint is moved
up or down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in three dif-
ferent positions.
Lowering the front seat backrest
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
1
Also applies to power seat.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Do not use the space behind the front seat,
or the rear seat's centre seat, when the front
seat backrest is lowered.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Power seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-
tion I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Seat with memory function*
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set-
tings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
Key memory* in remote control key
2
All remote control keys can be used by differ-
ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat and door mirrors
3
. Proceed as follows:
•
Adjust the seat as you want it.
•
Lock the car by pressing the lock button on
the remote control key that you normally
use. This stores the positions of the seat
and door mirrors in the remote control
key's memory
4
.
•
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but-
ton on the same remote control key) and
open the driver's door. The driver's seat
and door mirrors will automatically adopt
the positions that are stored in the remote
control key's memory (if the seat has been
moved since you locked the car).
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 203.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-
ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the rear seat passengers is in dan-
ger of becoming trapped.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 217.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to passen-
ger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(see illustration) must be pressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif-
ferent positions.
2
For key memory for Keyless function, see page 52.
3
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
4
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
84
NOTE
Do not sit in the centre seat with the head
restraint in fully lowered position.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked posi-
tion after being folded up.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear
seat cup holder must not be open and there
must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may
the seat belts be connected. Otherwise
there is a risk of damage to the rear seat
upholstery.
The two-section backrest can be folded in dif-
ferent ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
•
Both sections can be folded separately.
•
If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
If the right-hand section is being lowered -
release and adjust the centre seat head
restraint downwards, see page 83.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
matically when the backrests are lowered.
Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest forward at the
same time. A red indicator on the lock
catch
shows that the backrest is no
longer locked in place.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
85
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the
head restraints must be moved forward
slightly so as not to make contact with the
seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-
erly after being folded up.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
03
86
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjusting
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see page 233.
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 145
Adaptive cruise control, see page 147
Audio and phone control, see page 241.
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
Light switches
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting as well as ceiling lamps,
mood lights and lighting in the front door
storage compartments*
Rear fog lamp
Light switches
Thumbwheel
1
for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 79.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto-
matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not
equipped with the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
1
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Posi-
tion
Specification
Daytime running lights
Main beam flash operates in this
position.
Daytime running lights when the
car is being driven. Automatic
switching to parking lights when
the car is parked.
Posi-
tion
Specification
Daytime running lights during
daytime driving. Automatic
switching to dipped beam in
poor light conditions and when
windscreen wipers or rear fog
lamps are activated.
The "Tunnel detection*" func-
tion activates dipped beam in
poor light conditions.
The function for "Main beam
with automatic activation*" can
be used.
Main beam flash operates in this
position.
Dipped beam
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash operates in this
position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used,
as long as the traffic situation or weather con-
ditions are not unfavourable for the function for
"Main beam with automatic activation*".
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-
ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Light switch in position AUTO.
With the light switch in the position, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are activated
automatically during the daytime. This is regu-
lated by a light sensor which switches from
daytime running lights to dipped beam off the
main headlamps at dusk or when the daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam
also takes place if the windscreen wipers or
rear foglights are activated.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption,
the rear lights are also switched off when
switching automatically from dipped beam
to DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with its lights in a cor-
rect state and in accordance with applicable
traffic regulations.
Dipped beam
In position, dipped beam is activated
automatically at dusk or when daylight
becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also acti-
vated automatically if the windscreen wipers or
rear foglights are activated.
In position
dipped beam is always acti-
vated when the engine is running or when key
position II is active.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the head-
lamp control is in position
. Activate/
deactivate main beam by moving the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel to the end
position and release. Alternatively, the main
beam can be deactivated by a light press of the
stalk switch toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the sym-
bol
illuminates in the combined instru-
ment panel.
Main beam with automatic activation -
AHB*
Main beam with automatic activation (Active
High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the wind-
screen to detect the headlamp beams of
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
front, and then switches from main beam to
dipped beam. The lights are switched back to
main beam a second or so after the camera
sensor no longer detects any such light.
This function can be activated when the head-
lamp control is in position
. For activation
to take place, the engine must have been run-
ning for at least 20 seconds and the speed of
the car must be 20 km/h or higher.
Light switch in position AUTO.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-
hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and release. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights
switch directly to dipped beam.
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In cars with analogue combined instrument
panel:
When AHB has been activated, the symbol
illuminates in the instrument panel dis-
play. When main beam has been activated, the
symbol also illuminates in the instru-
ment panel display.
In cars with digital combined instrument
panel:
When AHB is activated, the
symbol
shines white in the instrument panel display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol
shines blue.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Swicth manually
is
shown in the combined instrument panel's dis-
play then you have to switch manually between
main and dipped beam. However, the head-
lamp control may nevertheless be in position
. The same applies if the message
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
and the symbol are shown. The
symbol goes out when these mes-
sages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in sit-
uations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the wind-
screen sensors are no longer blocked, the
message goes out and the
symbol illu-
minates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light com-
position when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
In freezing rain
•
In snow flurries or slush
•
In moonlight
•
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
•
When the traffic ahead has weak light-
ing
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
•
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see page 171.
Tunnel detection*
In cars fitted with a rain sensor*, the rain sensor
detects the change in light conditions when the
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
car enters a tunnel, for example. The lighting is
then switched within one second from daytime
running lights to the main headlamps' dipped
beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has
emerged from the tunnel, the lights return to
daytime running lights. If the car is driven into
another tunnel within this time period, the
return to daytime running lights is cancelled.
This prevents frequent changes to the car light-
ing. Note! - The headlamp control must be in
position for tunnel detection to work.
Active Xenon headlamps ABL*
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps Active Bending Lights - ABL the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum light-
ing in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not been
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR). In
the event of a fault in the function the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument
panel at the same time as the information dis-
play shows an explanatory text and a further
illuminated symbol.
Symbol Display Specifica-
tion
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system
is disen-
gaged. Visit
a workshop
if the mes-
sage
remains.
Volvo rec-
ommends
that you
contact an
authorised
Volvo work-
shop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark-
ness and only when the car is moving.
The function
2
can be deactivated/ activated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the menu
system, see page 204.
2
Activated on delivery from the factory.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
92
Position/parking lamps
Headlamp control in position for position/parking
lamps.
Turn the light switch to the position for posi-
tion/parking lights (the numberplate lights
come on at the same time).
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position lamps illuminate to
alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespec-
tive of what position the headlamp control is in
or what key position the car's electrical system
is in.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 129.
Rear fog lamp
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of two rear lamps
and can only be switched on in combination
with main/dipped beam.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
indicator symbol
on the combined
instrument panel and the light in the button illu-
minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked so
suddenly that the emergency brake lights have
been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The
hazard warning flashers remain on when the
car has stopped and are deactivated automat-
ically when the car is driven off again or the
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
button is depressed. For more information on
Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard
warning flashers, see page 129.
Direction indicators/flashers
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings
Car
settings
Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu
system, see page 204.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 72.
Interior lighting
Controls in the roof console for the front reading
lamps and ceiling lamps.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting (floor
lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front reading lamps*
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear reading lamps*
Rear reading lamps.
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly
pressing the relevant button.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Floor lamps* and ceiling lamps
The floor lamps and ceiling lamps are switched
on and off respectively when a side door is
opened or closed.
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the
MY CAR menu system under Settings
Car
settings
Light settings Interior light
Floor lights. Select from Off, Low and High.
For more information on the
MY CAR
menu
system, see page 205.
Lighting in the front door storage
compartments*
Lighting in the front door storage compart-
ments comes on when the engine starts.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 236, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Auto function for passenger
compartment lighting
The auto function is activated when the lamp
in the AUTO button is lit.
The passenger compartment lighting is then
switched on and off as indicated below.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see pages 44 or 47
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
•
the engine is started
•
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after two minutes.
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is run-
ning, an LED in the front roof console illumi-
nates in order to provide a low light and
enhance the mood while driving. The light also
makes it better to see objects in the storage
compartments, etc. when it is dark out. Light
intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu
system under Settings
Car settings
Light settings Interior light Ambient
light. Select from
Off, Low and High. This
lighting extinguishes when the engine is
switched off.
If the car also has mood lights in the roof con-
sole for rear reading lamps*, the colour of the
lights can be set in the MY CAR menu system
under Settings
Car settings Light
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
95
settings Interior light Ambient light
colours. If you select
Temperature, the colour
shifts between warm white and cold white
depending on the temperature in the car or you
can choose between different colour themes.
The available colour themes are
Frosty
White
, Toscana White, Ember Gold, Red
Sunset
, Rainforest, Glacier Blue and Violet
Purple
. For more information on the MY CAR
menu system, see page 205.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 87.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior ceiling lamps and floor
lamps are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car
settings
Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 204.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 44, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior ceiling lamps
and floor lamps are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light-
ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings
Car
settings
Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 204.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G021151
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G021152
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
set for right or left-hand traffic.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Active Xenon headlamps*
The light pattern does not need to be adjusted.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars see page 98. The
template scale is 1:2. Use a photocopier
with a zoom function to copy the templates
at 200 %:
•
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
•
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
•
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
•
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the head-
lamp lenses; see the lines on page 97.
Position the self-adhesive templates at the
design lines with the help of the illustration.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
97
Aligning the templates
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
98
Templates for halogen headlamps
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
Windscreen wipers
1
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the wind-
screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades see see
page 341 and 357.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol
is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Deactivate
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton
or move the stalk switch down to
another wiper program.
1
Replacing the wiper blades see page 341, service position, wiper blade see page 341 and filling washer fluid see page 343.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
100
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch
off the rain sensor while the car is in motion
or when the remote control key is in position
I or II. The symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel and the light in the button go
out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once
the stalk switch has been released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should
fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined
instrument panel's display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-
screen and the visibility through it.
Wiping and washing the rear window
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a cool-
ing period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat in the motor and the outside
temperature).
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
101
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping
2
. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
2
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
102
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro-
vides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insu-
lation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and other windows* have lami-
nated glass.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 358.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors, see
page 105.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A 65 mm
B 150 mm
C 125 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-
reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip-
ment, it should be positioned on the part of the
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the
highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 60.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
103
WARNING
Check that no rear seat passengers are
trapped when the windows are closed from
the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not trapped if the windows are closed, even
when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with
you when leaving the car. For information on
key positions - see page 80.
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors can only each oper-
ate their respective power window. Only one
control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used the
key position must be at least I - see page 79.
The power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive
closing interruptions the pinch protection will
be forced and the automatic function deacti-
vated for a short while, now it is possible to
close by continually holding the button pulled
up.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or from
inside with central locking, see pages 44 and
55.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
104
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Door mirrors
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirror on the driver's side is the wide-
angle type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than they
actually are.
Storing the position
1
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
ory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory Personal
settings in key memory. For a description of
the menu system, see page 204.
Angling the door mirror when parking
1
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
1
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 82.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the driver
can see the side of the road when parking for
example. When reverse gear is disengaged the
mirror automatically returns to its original posi-
tion after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or
Tilt right mirror. For a descrip-
tion of the menu system, see page 204.
Automatic retraction when locking
1
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system,
see page 204.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
ously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-
matically stop in the fully retracted posi-
tion.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 95.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
Heating for windscreen (1), rear window and door
mirrors (2)
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the
ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
1
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 82.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
106
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is
switched off automatically after a certain time.
Refer to the section "Heated windscreen and
max. defroster" on page 219.
The door mirrors and rear window are demis-
ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started
in an outside temperature lower than +9 °C.
Automatic defrosting can be selected in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Climate settings Automatic rear
defroster. Select between
On or Off. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 204.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is
reactivated.
Interior rearview mirror
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
The compass* can only be specified for rear-
view mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 107.
Glass roof*
The glass roof is fixed, but the blind can be
operated in key position I or II with the control
in the roof console. For information on key
positions - see page 79.
Automatic opening to end position
Manual opening until the button is released
Manual closing until the button is released
Automatic closing to end position
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 79. To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the rear side of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is
reactivated.
Calibration
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all elec-
trical equipment (climate control system,
wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors
are closed.
3. Hold the button on the rear of the rearview
mirror depressed approx. 6 seconds (using
a paper clip for example) until the character
C is shown.
G030295
Magnetic zones.
4. Hold the button on the rear of the rearview
mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The
number of the current magnetic zone is
shown.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the
character
C.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
108
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the alcolock
The function of the Alcolock
1
is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
Functions
Nozzle for breath test.
Switch.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-
tus:
Indicator lamp
(4)
Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro-
gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
1
Also called Alcoguard.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
Storage
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
•
The handheld alcolock unit is released by
depressing it slightly in its holder and
releasing it - it then springs out and can be
removed from the holder.
•
Replace the handheld unit in the holder by
pushing it in until it engages.
•
Store the handheld unit in the holder - this
provides it with the best protection and
keeps its batteries fully charged.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which
case, press the button (3) to transmit the
result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp
(5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Engine starting pos-
sible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in force
A
.
Red lamp + Disap-
proved test Wait 1
minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in force
A
.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page 108
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
110
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking
approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-
ried out in the event of a change of driver -
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop
2
every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows
Alcoguard Calibr. required. If
calibration is not carried out within these 30
days then normal engine starting will be
blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
tion will then be possible, see page 110 sec-
tion Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-
pears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop
2
can clear the mes-
sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-
ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows
Alcoguard insert
power cable
. In which case, connect the
power supply cable from the glovebox and wait
until indicator lamp (6) is green.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass
the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 8 in the section, Record-
ing data.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass
enabled
the whole time while driving and can
only be reset by a workshop
2
.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop
2
.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
Activating the Bypass function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for haz-
ard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and
then
Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after
which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop
2
.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for haz-
ard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the
engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop
2
.
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes-
sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-
play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes -
engine starting pos-
sible without new
test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a work-
shop
2
.
Alcoguard No sig-
nal
Transmission failed -
send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short -
blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard -
blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak -
blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished
- wait for text
Alco-
guard Blow 5 sec-
onds
.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
112
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Petrol and diesel engines
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 46.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
Note that if the car is equipped with an
alcolock then a breath test must first be
approved before the engine can be started
- see page 108.
2.
Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed
1
. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
3.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine starts
or until its overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car, and
make sure that the key position is 0 - in par-
ticular if there are children in the car. For
information on how this works - see
page 79.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
Keyless drive*
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
engines. For more information on Keyless drive
- see page 50.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the car to start is that one
of the car's remote control keys with the
Keyless drive* function is in the passenger
compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine:
1
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
113
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine
stops.
•
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the
gear selector is not in a position P or if the
car is moving - Press twice or hold the
START/STOP ENGINE button depressed
until the engine stops.
Steering lock
A mechanical noise can be perceived when the
steering lock unlocks or locks.
•
The steering lock unlocks when the remote
control key is in the ignition switch
2
and the
START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed.
•
The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's dif-
ferent key positions - see page 79
2
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
03
114
Jump starting
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or
other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-
tion 0, see page 79.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative ter-
minal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting procedure.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the connections when attempt-
ing to start, as there is a risk of sparking.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see
page 344.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
General
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function is available
for both manual and automatic transmissions.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to
the accelerator pedal before setting off or
reversing uphill.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver acceler-
ates.
IMPORTANT
The operating temperature of the gearbox is
checked in order to prevent damage to any
of the drive system's components. In the
event of a risk of overheating a warning
symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - In which
case, follow the recommendation given.
Manual gearbox
Gearing pattern.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park-
ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not
sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
•
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position,
N then depress the gear lever before mov-
ing it to R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Gear indicator*
An essential detail in connection with environ-
mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
to change gear in plenty of time.
As an aid, certain variants have an indicator -
GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - that informs the
driver when it is appropriate to engage the next
higher or lower gear to achieve the lowest pos-
sible fuel consumption. However, taking into
consideration characteristics such as perform-
ance and vibration-free running, it may be
advantageous to change gear at a higher
engine speed. The framed number indicates
the current gear.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
116
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instrument panel "Digital" with gear indicator.
Gear indicator for manual
box. Only one marker is illu-
minated at a time - it is illumi-
nated in the centre only during
normal driving.
When gearing up/down as
recommended, the upper one is illuminated at
"+" or the lower at "-", marked red in the illus-
tration.
With instrument panel "Ana-
logue", the gear positions and
indicator arrows are dis-
played in the centre of the
combined instrument panel.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic*
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
instrument panel in this man-
ner. (Only one marker is illu-
minated at a time - the one
showing the current gear
selector position.)
Symbol S for "Sport mode" is ORANGE when
the mode is active.
P – Parking position
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake
as well, as a precaution - see page 131.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when posi-
tion P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park-
ing on a slope - the automatic transmission
in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all sit-
uations.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
117
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
The manual gear position is reached by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at "+/-". The information display’s
symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to
orange and the digits
1 6 is displayed in a box,
which corresponds to the gear which has just
been selected.
•
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position between
+ and –.
or
•
Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
tion at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or back-
wards in its "+/-" position. The information
display then shifts the indication from
S to
show which of the gears
1-6 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
The Sport programme provides sportier cha-
racteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to
the side from D position to the end position at
"+/-". The information display shifts the indi-
cation from
D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear lever from the D position to the end
position at "+/-" - the instrument panel dis-
play shifts the indication from
D to the fig-
ure
1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from
1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
118
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G021351
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-
ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 79.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 79.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console.
Press and release the yellow button in the
console.
Move the gear selector from the P position.
4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
119
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is an automatic gearbox that has
double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to
a conventional automatic gearbox. An auto-
matic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter
instead that transfers power from engine to
gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-
bed in the previous section.
Powershift or Geartronic?
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
ignation on the transmission's label under the
bonnet - see page 366. The designa-
tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans-
mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-
minates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages:
•
Stop the car and wait with your foot on the
brake pedal until there is a moderate dis-
tance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a
short distance, and then wait another
moment with your foot on the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
For important information regarding
Powershift transmission and towing - see
page 305.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a
message at the same time as a symbol is illu-
minated.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
120
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-
stant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stationary using the foot brake.
A
Transm. overheat park safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.
A
Transm. cooling let engine run
No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool-
ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
A
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec-
tronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication
of the car being defective, but show that a
safety function has been activated with a
view to preventing damage to any of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily
halted in order to prevent the clutch from
malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and
is stationary until gearbox temperature has
cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 200.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk OK button.
03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide & Power*
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
General
These meters help the driver to drive the car
while maintaining the best possible economy.
To display or close a display of these functions,
see page 70.
The car also stores statistics of journeys made,
which can be viewed in the form of a block dia-
gram, see page 232.
EcoGuide
This meter provides an indication of how eco-
nomically the car is being driven.
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is displayed here - the
higher the result on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated on the
basis of speed, engine speed, engine power
utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low revs are
encouraged. The pointers fall under accelera-
tion and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter, which means poor
economy and hence should be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instanta-
neous value and describes how the car has
been driven of late. The higher the pointers on
the scale, the better the economy achieved by
the driver.
Power
This meter shows how much power is being
taken from the engine and how much power is
available.
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available
engine power
1
. The higher the result on the
scale, the more power is available in the current
gear.
Utilised power
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
power utilised
1
. The higher the result on the
1
Power is dependent on engine speed.
03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide & Power*
03
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
scale, the more power is being taken from the
engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates
a large power reserve.
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
Quieter and cleaner
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target-orientation has resulted
in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept
consists of an interaction between several sep-
arate energy-saving functions, all with the
common purpose of reducing fuel consump-
tion, which in turn contributes to reduced
exhaust emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and
cleaner...
Some engine and gearbox combinations come
fitted with a Start and Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or
waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then
switched off temporarily and restarts automat-
ically when the journey is due to continue.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop auto-
matically, whenever appropriate.
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the
Start/Stop function depending on whether the
gearbox is manual or automatic.
Function and operation
The Start/Stop function is
activated automatically when
the engine is started with the
key. The driver is alerted to
the function by means of this
symbol on the instrument
panel illuminating briefly, the
display text
Auto Start-Stop ON is shown and
the green lamp for the On/Off button illumi-
nates.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine
that has stopped automatically, except that
some equipment may have the function tem-
porarily reduced, e.g. the climate control sys-
tem's fan speed or extremely high volume on
the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine
In order that the engine should stop automati-
cally the car must be completely stationary:
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
124
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Conditions
M/A
A
Declutch, set the gear lever in
neutral position and release the
clutch pedal - the engine is
switched off.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake
and then keep your foot on the
pedal - the engine stops automat-
ically.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
The AUTO START symbol on the
information display illuminates as
verification and reminder that the engine has
stopped automatically.
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions
M/A
A
With the gear lever in neutral posi-
tion: Depress the clutch pedal or
press the accelerator pedal - the
engine starts. Engage a suitable
gear and continue the journey.
M
The following option is also avail-
able on a downhill gradient:
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
M
Release the foot pressure on the
foot brake - the engine starts
automatically and the journey can
continue.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Start assistance HSA
The foot brake can also be released on an uphill
gradient to start the engine automatically - the
HSA function means that the car does not roll
backwards.
HSA (Hill Start Assist) means that the pressure
in the brake system remains temporarily avail-
able while the driver moves his/her foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for
driving off with the engine having stopped
automatically. The temporary braking effect
releases after a couple of seconds or when the
driver accelerates.
There is more information available on HSA on
page 115.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out by pressing this
button once, at which point
the button's lamp goes out.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by
the information display's symbol going out and
the message
Auto Start-Stop OFF being dis-
played for a few seconds. The lamp in the but-
ton extinguishes at the same time.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the
engine does not stop automatically if:
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
Conditions
M/A
A
the car has not achieved
approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking
pace) first after a key start or the
last auto-stop.
M + A
the driver has opened the seat-
belt's buckle.
M + A
the capacity of the battery is
below the minimum permissible
level.
M + A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M + A
outside temperature is below
freezing point or above
approx. 30 °C.
M + A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the
preset values
B
- indicated by the
ventilation fan running at a high
speed.
M + A
the car is reversed. M + A
battery temperature is below
freezing point or above
approx. 55 °C.
M + A
Conditions
M/A
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M + A
the exhaust system's particulate
filter is full - the temporarily dis-
engaged Start/Stop function is
reactivated once an automatic
cleaning cycle has been per-
formed (see page 293).
M + A
the road is very steep. M + A
a trailer is connected electrically
to the car’s electrical system.
M + A
the atmospheric air pressure is
less than equivalent to
1500-2400 metres above sea level
- the current air pressure varies
with the prevailing weather con-
ditions.
M + A
adaptive cruise control Queue
Assist is activated.
A
Conditions
M/A
A
the driver’s door has been
opened with the gear selector in
D position.
A
the gear selector is moved out of
the D position to S position
C
or
"+/-".
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
B
Car with ECC.
C
Sport mode.
The engine auto-starts
An engine that has stopped automatically may
restart in some cases without the driver having
decided that the journey should continue. In
the following cases the engine also starts auto-
matically if the driver has not depressed the
clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her
foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Conditions
M/A
A
Misting forms on the windows. M + A
The environment in the passen-
ger compartment deviates from
the preset values
B
.
M + A
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Conditions
M/A
A
The outside temperature falls
below freezing point or exceeds
approx. 30 °C.
M + A
There is a temporarily high cur-
rent take-off or battery capacity
drops below the lowest permissi-
ble level.
M + A
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M + A
The car starts to roll - faster than
the equivalent normal walking
pace.
M
The driver's belt lock is opened
with the gear selector in D or N
position.
A
Steering wheel movements. A
The gear selector is moved from
the D position to "+/-" or R.
A
The driver’s door is opened with
the gear selector in D position.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine may
suddenly start automatically. First switch off
the engine as normal using the START/
STOP ENGINE button before opening the
bonnet.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
Conditions
M/A
A
A gear is engaged without
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
enable automatic starting.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the
gear selector is in P position and
the driver’s door is open - a nor-
mal engine start must take place.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Involuntary engine stop with manual
gearbox
In the event that a start-up fails and the engine
stops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set
in neutral position. The information display
then shows the text
Put gear in neutral
More information and settings
The MY CAR menu system in the car includes
instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe
concept along with several possible settings
and options - see page 204.
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
Text message
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may dis-
play text messages on the information display
for certain situations. For some of them there
is a recommended action that should be per-
formed. The following table shows some
examples.
Symbol Message Info/Action
M/A
A
Auto Start-Stop ON
Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been acti-
vated.
M + A
Auto Start-Stop OFF
Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been
switched off.
M + A
Auto Start-Stop Service required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M + A
Engine management system
An automatic function check is carried out. M + A
AUTO-
STOP
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the
brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
M
Depress clutch pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal
to be depressed.
M
Depress brake pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal
to be depressed.
M
Press brake and clutch to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or
clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Info/Action
M/A
A
Put gear in neutral
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the
gear lever in neutral position.
M
AUTO-
STOP
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the
brake pedal to be released.
A
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to
N or P position and start the engine as normal with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear
selector in P or N.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following com-
pletion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
129
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 372.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
Once the car’s speed has been braked to
below 10 km/h, the brake light stops flashing
and returns to a normal steady shine - hazard
warning flashers are activated at the same
time, which flash until the driver accelerates the
car to at least 20 km/h or they are disabled with
their button, see page 92.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-
faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
car has been washed. Carry this out by braking
gently during a short period while en route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and
so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the
driver's braking style and increases brake force
as necessary. The brake force can be rein-
forced up to the level when the ABS system is
engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when
the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
130
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see
page 328.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's compo-
nents must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-
est workshop and have the brake system
checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
131
General
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park-
ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in
P if it has automatic transmission, is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
The instrument panel's warning symbol.
The lever is located between the front seats.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
> The instrument panel’s warning symbol
lights up.
NOTE
- The warning symbol in the com-
bined instrument panel comes on irrespec-
tive of whether the parking brake is applied
lightly or hard.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake
lever must be applied at least a little more
firmly.
•
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button,
release the lever and release the button.
> The instrument panel’s warning symbol
goes out.
If the driver forgets to release the parking brake
– in addition to the illuminated warning lamp –
a pinging sound combined with a message in
the instrument panel alerts the driver of this
when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
HomeLink
1
is a programmable remote control
which is integrated in the rearview mirror and
can remotely control up to three different devi-
ces (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system,
outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.) and in
doing so replace their remote controls. In addi-
tion to the three programmable buttons, there
is also an indicator lamp in the panel.
HomeLink
cannot be activated when the car
is locked from the outside. For more informa-
tion on HomeLink
, visit: www.homelink.com
or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number, +49 6838 907 277).
WARNING
•
If HomeLink
is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the door
or gate while it is moving.
•
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
•
Do not use HomeLink
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also rec-
ommended that the programming for the but-
tons is deleted if the car is sold. See the section
"Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on page
133.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink
can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink
for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink
buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLink
is set in "learn mode" and
ready for programming.
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button until the indicator lamp flashes yel-
low. This indicates that the button is ready
for programming.
2. Aim the original remote control towards the
HomeLink
button to be programmed and
hold it 5-30 cm from the button. Do not
obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLink
.
3. Press and hold the button on the original
remote control. Do not release the button
until the indicator lamp has changed from
a yellow light to either red or green. If the
indicator lamp is red – make a new attempt
1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
133
to program the remote control, holding the
original remote control at a different dis-
tance from the HomeLink
button. A green
light indicates that programming was suc-
cessful.
4.
Depress the HomeLink
button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is acti-
vated. If the door is not activated, press the
programmed HomeLink
button and hold
it depressed and check the indicator lamp.
>
Steady green light: The indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow when
the button is kept depressed, this indi-
cates that the programming is com-
plete. The garage door, gate or similar
should now be activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed.
Flashing green light: The indicator
lamp flashes while the button is held
depressed. In which case, continue with
the programming steps 5-7 in order to
complete the programming of a device
with rolling code (usually a garage door
opener).
5.
Locate the "programming button
2
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
6. Depress and release the receiver's "pro-
gramming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
7. While the receiver's "programming button"
is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLink
being programmed and hold it
depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence up to 3 times to conclude the
programming.
Operation
When HomeLink
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press and hold the programmed button
3
until
the garage door, alarm system, etc. is activated
(may take several seconds). Naturally the orig-
inal remote controls can still be used in parallel
with HomeLink
if required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLink
on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLink
buttons at the same time, not each
button individually. However, individual but-
tons can be reprogrammed, see the following
section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons on
HomeLink
. Do not release them until the
indicator lamp has changed from a yellow
light to either red or green.
2. Release the buttons.
>
HomeLink
is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprog-
rammed, see section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 132.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
3
The indicator lamp remains lit while the button is held depressed.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Depress the required button and do not
release.
2.
When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash yellow (after about 10 sec-
onds), release the button and start with
step 2 of section "Programming Home-
Link®" on page 132.
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLink
, visit: www.homelink.com or
ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
03 Your driving environment
03
135
G000000
136
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
DSTC – Stability and traction control system....................................... 138
Road sign information - RSI*................................................................ 141
Speed limiter*........................................................................................ 143
Cruise control*...................................................................................... 145
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 147
Distance Warning*................................................................................. 158
City Safety™......................................................................................... 161
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*................ 167
Driver Alert System*.............................................................................. 175
Driver Alert System - DAC*................................................................... 176
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*.............................................. 180
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 184
Park assist camera*.............................................................................. 187
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*........................................................................ 190
BLIS and CTA*...................................................................................... 194
DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
04
138
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
The stability and traction control system is
a supplementary function - it cannot handle
all situations in all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility for
ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and
that applicable road traffic rules and regu-
lations are followed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function reduces engine power if the drive
wheels slip against the underlying surface in
order to maintain stability and traction.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun-
tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability
to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control – CTC
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend with-
out wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an
arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps
the driver steer the car in the right direction
when there is reduced traction or when the
ABS system engages.
The primary role of the DSR function is to help
the driver steer in the right direction when the
car is skidding.
DSR engages by applying slight torque to the
steering wheel in the direction in which the car
should be steered to maintain/achieve maxi-
mum possible traction and stabilise the car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
The function serves to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
page 299.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The DSTC system is always activated - it can-
not be deactivated.
However, the driver can select the Sport mode,
which allows for a more active driving experi-
ence. In Sport mode the system detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding with the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing
the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system
intervenes and stabilises the car.
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
04
``
139
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
1.
Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the display screen's menu
system and locate My V40
DSTC. (For
information on the menu system, see
page 203).
2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu
system with EXIT.
> The system then allows a more sporty
driving style.
The Sport mode is active until the driver dese-
lects it or until the engine is switched off - after
the engine is started the next time the DSTC
system is back in its normal mode again.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
A
Message Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reac-
tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
DSTC system disengaged.
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
and
"Message"
There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it!
Constant glow for 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
04
140
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.
Sport mode is activated.
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
General information on RSI
Examples of readable speed related
1
signs.
The Road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which road signs the car has passed through
information on - among other things - the cur-
rent speed, the start/end of a motorway or
road, and when overtaking is prohibited.
If a sign for both a motorway/road for motor-
ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
Operation
Recorded speed information.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the sign is displayed as a sym-
bol on the instrument panel.
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a sign
showing that overtaking is
prohibited may also be dis-
played where appropriate.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs
1
.
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-
ted for the same road - an additional sign then
indicates the circumstances under which the
different speeds apply. The road section may
be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1
Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market - the illustration shows examples only.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
04
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated by means of
an additional sign containing
an arrow. The arrow is dis-
played under the symbol
showing the speed.
Speed signs linked to this type of additional
sign are displayed only if the driver is using the
direction indicator.
Limited distance or time of day
Some speeds are applicable
only after a specific distance
or at a certain time of day. The
driver's attention is drawn to
the situation by means of an
empty frame under the sym-
bol showing the speed.
Setting in MY CAR
Options in MY CAR.
The instrument panel’s speed symbol display
can be disabled. To deactivate the RSI func-
tion:
•
Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings
Car settings Road Sign
Information and go back out of the menu
by pressing EXIT, see page 205.
Speed warning
The driver can opt to receive a warning (Speed
Alert) when the applicable speed limit is excee-
ded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given
by the symbol showing the applicable maxi-
mum speed temporarily flashing when this
speed is exceeded.
To activate speed warning:
•
Check speed warning in MY CAR
Settings
Car settings Speed alert
and go back out of the menu by pressing
EXIT, see page 205.
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited -
just like the human eye. Find out more about
this on page 171.
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are some other examples of what can
disrupt the function:
•
Faded signs
•
Signs positioned on bends
•
Rotated or damaged signs
•
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
•
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
143
General information on the speed
limiter
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
speed by the speed limiter.
Operation
Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel (Dig-
ital or Analogue).
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6)
is displayed in combination with a mark (5) by
the set maximum speed in the display.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during
a journey and while stationary.
While driving
1.
Press the steering wheel button
to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for the speed limiter is
illuminated on the instrument panel dis-
play.
2. When the car is moving at the desired high-
est possible speed: Press one of the steer-
ing wheel buttons
or until the instru-
ment panel display shows a mark (5) next
to the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
When stationary
1.
Press the steering wheel button
to
switch on the speed limiter.
2.
Scroll with the
button until the instru-
ment panel display shows a mark (5) next
to the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it when
the instrument panel’s display shows a
mark (5) next to the desired maximum
speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
set it in standby mode:
–
Press
.
> The display mark (5) changes colour
from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or from
WHITE to GREY (Analogue) and the
driver can temporarily exceed the set
maximum speed.
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
04
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one
press on
. The mark (5) in the display
then changes colour from WHITE to
GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE
(Analogue) and the car's maximum
speed is limited again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap-
idly accelerating the car out of a situation:
– Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The display shows the stored maximum
speed with a coloured mark (5) and the
driver can temporarily exceed the set
maximum speed – the display mark (5)
changes colour from GREEN to WHITE
(Digital) or WHITE to GREY (Analogue)
during that time.
The speed limiter is automatically re-
activated after the accelerator pedal is
released and the car's speed is slowed
down to below the selected/stored
maximum speed - the mark (5) in the
display changes colour from WHITE to
GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE
(Analogue) and the car's maximum
speed is again limited.
Alarm for speed exceeded
On steep roads the engine braking effect may
be inadequate and the selected maximum
speed exceeded. The driver is alerted about
this with an acoustic signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed
to below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
if the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
or has been depressed during the last
half minute.
Deactivate
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The display's speed limiter symbol (6)
and the set speed mark (5) are cleared.
The selected and stored speed are thus
deleted from the memory and cannot be
resumed with the
button.
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limita-
tion.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
General information on CC
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
more relaxing driving on motorways and long,
straight roads with regular traffic flows.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Operation
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
without speed limiter
1
.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
with speed limiter
1
.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button
1
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
04
146
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
> Symbol (6) in the display changes from
GREY to WHITE and shows that the cruise
control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or .
> The current speed is stored in the memory
and the display dot (5) comes on at the
selected speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
depressed for several minutes then it is
blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press .
> The display dot (5) and symbol (6) change
colour from WHITE to GREY.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
wheels lose traction
•
the foot brake is used
•
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
•
the clutch pedal is depressed
•
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi-
tion (automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button .
> The display dot (5) and symbol (6) change
colour from GREY to WHITE and the speed
is then set to the last speed stored.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead. Adaptive
cruise control provides a more relaxing driving
experience on long journeys on motorways
and long straight main roads in smooth traffic
flows.
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to the standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned instead by Distance Warning (see
page 158) about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-
tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for informa-
tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
control. The driver must be familiar with this
information before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assistant, see page 152.
Function
Function overview
1
.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing sys-
tem.
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low
sound when they are being used by the adap-
tive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con-
trol brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath
the brake pedal as it may become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see
any vehicle in front then the car will instead
maintain the cruise control's set speed. This
also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front
exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must brake
himself/herself. This applies with large differ-
ences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes
heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all,
see page 154.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h
2
up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes
too low, the cruise control is set in standby
mode at which automatic braking ceases - the
driver must then take over himself/herself to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound (see figure on page 167) to alert the
driver that immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
strong sunlight or when wearing sun-
glasses.
WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles which
the radar sensor has detected. Hence the
warning may not be given, or it may be given
with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warn-
ing without braking when so required.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead
when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a
heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be
extra attentive and ready to slow down.
2
Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 152.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
Operation
The design of the steering wheel keypad differs
depending on whether the car is equipped with
the speed limiter
3
.
WITH speed limiter
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
WITHOUT speed limiter
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button - a sim-
ilar WHITE symbol comes on in the display
(6) which shows the cruise control is in
standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or .
> The current speed is stored in the memory,
the display shows a "magnifying glass"
around the selected speed for a second or
so and its marking (6) changes from WHITE
to GREEN.
When this display symbol changes
colour from WHITE to GREEN, the
cruise control is active and the car maintains
the stored speed.
3
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
150
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Only when the display shows
a picture of another vehicle is
the distance to the vehicle in
front controlled by the cruise
control.
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
• the higher speed with
GREEN marking (6) is the pre-
programmed speed
• the lower speed is the speed
of the car in front.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator
pedal prior to pressing the
/ button,
then it is the car's current speed when the
button is pressed that is stored in the
cruise control.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
depressed for several minutes then it is
blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. Then the display shows
Cruise control Unavailable, see
page 156.
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corre-
sponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Turn the steering wheel button set's
thumbwheel (or use the
/ buttons for
cars without Speed limiters).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance
Warning is activated, see page 158.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing
an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
This display symbol and stored speed
marking then changes colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
Keypad without Speed limiter*
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button .
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set automatically in standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute
4
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the last stored speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, such as DSTC (see page 138).
If any of these systems stop working then
cruise control is automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message
Cruise control
Cancelled
is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
the driver opens the door
•
the driver takes off his seatbelt
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
speed falls below 30 km/h
5
•
wheels lose traction
•
brake temperature is high
•
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Overtaking another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtake with
the direction indicator
6
, the cruise control helps
to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle
in front.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations other than during over-
taking, e.g. when a direction indicator is
used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
another road - the car will then accelerate
briefly.
Deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with
a short press of the steering wheel button
.
4
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
5
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
6
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The set speed is cleared and cannot be
resumed with the
button.
Keypad without Speed limiter
A short press on the steering wheel button
sets cruise control to standby mode. With
a further short press the cruise control is deac-
tivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be
resumed with the
button.
Switch from ACC to CC
A button press can be used to deactivate the
adaptive element (spacing system) in the
cruise control, the car then only following the
set speed.
•
Hold down the steering wheel button -
the display’s symbol changes from
to
.
> This activates the standard cruise control
CC (Cruise Control), see page 145.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after
switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows
the set speed.
Switch from CC back to ACC
Deactivate CC with 1-2 presses on as
described under the heading "Switch off – Key-
pad without speed limiter". ACC will be acti-
vated the next time the system is switched on.
Queue Assistant
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the Queue
Assist function (also referred to as "Queue
Assist").
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also below 30 km/
h and at standstill
•
Change of target
•
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the
cruise control is capable of following another
vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed
cannot be selected.
Extended speed range
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the cruise control
can follow another vehicle within the range
0-200 km/h.
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto-
matically resumed if the stops do not exceed
about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
car in front starts moving again then the cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking. The driver must then re-activate the
cruise control in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button .
or
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The cruise control will then resume follow-
ing the vehicle in front.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
NOTE
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for
a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes
release.
See more information under the header
below, "Cessation of automatic braking
when stationary".
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will slow down for the stationary
vehicle.
WARNING
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and
the target is changed from a moving vehicle
to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
select the stored speed.
•
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Cruise control is disengaged and set in
standby mode:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise
control is not sure whether the target
object is a stationary vehicle or some other
object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con-
trol no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In the following situations, Queue Assist stops
automatic braking at a standstill:
•
the driver opens the door
•
the driver takes off his seatbelt
This means that the brakes are released and
the car will start to roll - the driver must there-
fore intervene and brake the car himself in
order to maintain its position.
IMPORTANT
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for
a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes
release.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over
several stages, with increasing intensity:
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes-
sage.
2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also
starts to flash.
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is set
to standby mode in these situations as well:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
•
the driver sets the cruise control in standby
mode
•
the parking brake is applied.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The radar sensor and its limitations
The radar sensor is used - apart from by Adap-
tive cruise control - by the following functions
as well:
•
Collision Warning with Auto Brake, see
page 167
•
Distance Warning, see page 158.
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in
the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-
tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for informa-
tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
control. The driver must be familiar with this
information before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-
cles in front is reduced significantly:
•
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have col-
lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see the "Maintenance" page 170
•
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car and
vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual
this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
Cruise Control - Distance Warning and Colli-
sion Warning with Auto Brake functions are not
operating either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
156
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-
nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
A
Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal position
- see page 138.
Cruise control Cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed him-
self.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Cruise control Unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
brake temperature is high
•
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event
of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to ordinary Cruise control (CC), see page 152 - a display
text provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Cruise control Service required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press Brake To hold + acoustic
alarm + warning light in windscreen +
"pulling" brakes
(Only with Queue Assistant)
The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is
why the car may start rolling soon.
•
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until
the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Only following
(Only with Queue Assistant)
Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without
a vehicle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
Orange warning lamp
1
.
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu-
minates with a constant glow if the distance to
the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time
interval.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre-
set value - the speed of the driver's vehicle
is not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
Settings
Car settings Distance Alert.
For a description of the menu system - see
page 203.
Set time interval
Controls and display for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On (during adjustment).
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corre-
sponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive
cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
Adaptive Cruise Control function, see
page 147.
Only use the time interval permitted by the
local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
ing system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 154.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-
cles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
160
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Radar blocked See manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain
or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Collision warn. Service required
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
General
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the
traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten-
tion, could lead to an incident.
The function is active at speeds under
50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of imminent risk of
collision with vehicles in front, should the driver
not react in time by braking and/or steering
away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car
is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 167.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be per-
formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road condi-
tions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles
or to humans and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a
higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for main-
taining the proper distance and speed.
Function
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window
1
.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of
the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of
collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake
the car, which may be experienced as sudden
braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances, just
behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this
is well outside normal driving style and may be
experienced as being uncomfortable.
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
162
If the difference in speed between the vehicles
is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety™ may
not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain
full brake force, the driver must depress the
brake pedal. This could then make it possible
to prevent a collision, even at speed differen-
ces above 15 km/h.
When the function is activated and brakes, the
instrument panel display shows a message to
the effect that the function is/has been active.
NOTE
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake lights
come on.
Operation
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always ena-
bled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 79 on key
positions).
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows:
•
Using MY CAR on the centre console dis-
play screen with its menu system, search
and locate Settings
Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
Select the
Off option. For more information
on the menu system MY CAR, see
page 203.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless
of whether the system was enabled or dis-
abled when the engine was switched off.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits laser light even when
City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
•
Follow the same procedure as for disa-
bling, but select the
On option.
Limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
The sensor has limitations. It does not work as
well – or does not work at all – in e.g. heavy
snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or bliz-
zards. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen
may disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the
bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec-
tors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such sit-
uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro-
vide best possible braking force with main-
tained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which
is why City Safety™ does not intervene in sit-
uations where the driver is steering or acceler-
ating in a clear manner, even if a collision is
unavoidable.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
163
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca-
tion, page 161).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked
is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play, it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
The
Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the laser
sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be
diligent about keeping the windscreen and
area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with sug-
gestions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
laser sensor is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor
field of vision is
blocked.
Remove the block-
ing object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the windscreen in front of either of the
laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a
surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger),
then a workshop must be contacted for
repair or replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location, page
161) - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™
performance the following also applies:
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted. Using the wrong windscreen
may result in the City Safety function
failing to operate or operating incor-
rectly.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
164
Laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels are affixed directly on
the laser sensor unit:
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the
physical data of the laser beam:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand-
ards for laser product design with the
exception of deviations in accordance with
"Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 ¦J
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x verti-
cal)
28° × 12°
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar opti-
cal instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sen-
sor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
ommend an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation,
do not carry out any readjustments or
maintenance other than those specified
here.
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe
and therefore entails a risk of injury.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
165
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's con-
nector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in posi-
tion II and also with the engine switched
off (see page 79 on key positions).
Symbols and messages in the display
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate on the instrument panel and a
message may appear on its display.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction
indicator stalk.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
166
Symbol
A
Message Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 162.
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
General
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-
trian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver
when there is a risk of colliding with a pedes-
trian or vehicle in front that is stationary or
moving in the same direction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter-
vention.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the
collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the
driver solely relies on Collision Warning with
Auto Brake to do the braking, there will be a
collision sooner or later.
Two system levels
Depending on how the car equipped, the Col-
lision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection function may appear in two variants:
Level 1 and Level 2.
Level 1
The driver is merely warned of occurring obsta-
cles by means of visual and acoustic signals -
no automatic braking intervenes, the driver
must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
means of visual and acoustic signals - the car
is braked automatically if the driver himself
does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-
trian Detection must only be carried out in a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Function
Function overview
1
.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of
a collision risk.
Radar sensor
2
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support
2
3.
Auto Brake
2
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
2
With system Level 2 only.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
168
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ complement each other. For more
information on City Safety™, see page 161.
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedes-
trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or
a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted with
a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in the fig-
ure on page 167) and an acoustic signal
2 - Brake support
2
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for fast braking by applying the brakes gently,
which may be experienced as a slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's brak-
ing if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
2
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started
to take evasive action and the risk of collision
is imminent then the automatic braking func-
tion is deployed - this takes place irrespective
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
then takes place with full brake force in order
to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
driving in another direction to the car or to
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section "Function"
and the section "Limitations" inform about
limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using the Collision Warning system
with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians do not work in darkness and
tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a col-
lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even when
the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver
is always responsible that the correct dis-
tance and speed are maintained - even
when the collision warning system with
auto-brake is used.
2
With system Level 2 only.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
Detection of pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedes-
trians receives as unambiguous information as
possible about the contours of the body - this
implies the opportunity to identify the head,
arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body
combined with a normal human pattern of
movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/
she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
•
The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when street-
lights are lit.
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-
trian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti-
ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth-
ing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven properly and with a
safety distance adapted to the speed.
Operation
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre
console display screen and menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 203.
Warning signals On and Off
It is possible to choose whether the collision
warning system's acoustic and visual warning
systems should be on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-
tions are always activated - they cannot be
deactivated.
Light and acoustic signal
To switch off both the light and the acoustic
signal:
•
Go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems
Collision Warning.
Once there, remove the mark from the box.
The warning lamp (no. [1] in the figure on page
167) is tested each time the engine is started
by briefly illuminating the separate light points
of the warning lamp if the light and acoustic
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
warnings for the collision warning system are
active.
Acoustic signal
The warning sound can be activated/deacti-
vated separately:
•
Select On or Off in the menu system under
Settings
Car settings Driver
support systems
Collision Warning
Warning sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Select Long, Normal or Short in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings
Car
settings
Driver support systems
Collision Warning Warning distance
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance
Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with
Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
uations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
Only use warning distance
Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will be
used by the cruise control even if the colli-
sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but
the function cannot shorten driver reaction
time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance
Alert set at time interval 4–5, see page 158.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning with
Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles
- this may cause severe damage and injury
and risk lives.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display screen. Search with the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car
settings
Driver support systems
Collision Warning, see page 203.
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be
kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
Limitations
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes-
trian Detection is active from approx. 4 km/h.
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustra-
tion on page 167) may be difficult to notice in
the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when
sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not
looking straight ahead. The warning sound
should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity to
avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS
and DSTC systems will provide best possible
braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
Warnings may not appear if the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and the system therefore pro-
vides effective warnings and brake inter-
ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are effec-
tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark-
ness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 154.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This then leads to the system provid-
ing a warning at a later stage, which reduces
the total number of warnings; see the section
"Set warning distance" on page 170.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo-
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations
where the car is approaching a vehicle in front
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well
as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by
the functions:
•
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming -
see page 89
•
Road sign information - see page 141.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Driver Alert Control – see page 176
•
Lane Keeping Aid - see page 180
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i. e. they "see" worse in dark-
ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be sig-
nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce camera sensor func-
tion when it is used to scan the carriageway
and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
ited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles
cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked
then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front
of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto-
matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
Keeping Aid functions will not have full func-
tionality either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the
message remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to meas-
ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Collis'n warning OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn. Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was activated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Radar blocked See manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of
heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Collision warn. Service required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
General information on Driver Alert
System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
•
Driver Alert Control – DAC, see page 176.
•
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA, see page 180.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
The functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all sit-
uations but is designed merely as a supple-
mentary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Driver aid status
The current status for all driver aids can be
checked in MY CAR, see page 205.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on DAC
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when
he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if
he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel move-
ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations -
see page 171.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-
riorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at reg-
ular intervals, and make sure you are well
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
in strong side winds.
•
on rutted road surfaces.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis-
play screen and its menu system. For informa-
tion on how the menu system is used, see
page 203.
On/Off
To set Driver Alert in standby mode:
•
In MY CAR, search for Car settings
Driver support systems Driver Alert
and check the box - No check in the box:
Function disengaged.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver is notified with an
audible signal plus the text message
Driver Alert Time for a break - the
linked symbol is lit on the instrument panel at
the same time. The warning is repeated after a
time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as
a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-
ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
178
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages
Instrument panel
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Driver Alert Time for a break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal
+ text.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Driver Alert Sys Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
A
The symbols are schematic.
Display
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available
The function is activated.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily dis-
engaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
A
The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the Lane
Keeping Aid
The Lane Keeping Aid function (Lane Keeping
Aid) is intended for use on motorways and sim-
ilar major roads to reduce the risk of the vehicle
accidentally leaving its own lane in certain sit-
uations.
A camera reads the painted side lines of the
road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line,
the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the car
back into the lane with slight steering torque in
the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or passes a side line, the
Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing
vibrations in the steering wheel.
WARNING
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable laws and road
traffic regulations are followed.
Function
The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the
speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with
clearly visible side lines. The function is tem-
porarily deactivated on narrow roads with less
than 2.6 metres between the lane side lines.
Off & On
Press the button in the centre console to acti-
vate or deactivate the function. The function is
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in
the centre console - in which case the function
is handled instead by the car's menu system
MY CAR. Here, proceed as follows:
•
Select On or Off under Settings Car
settings
Lane Keeping Aid.
For a description of the menu system - see
page 203.
In addition, the following selections can be
made in MY CAR:
•
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel:
Vibration only - On or Off.
•
Active steering: Steering assist only -
On or Off.
•
Both Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel and Active steering:
Full function -
On or Off.
Active steering
The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car
within the side lines for the lane.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
LKA intervenes and steers away.
If the vehicle approaches the left or right side
line of the lane and the direction indicator is not
activated, the car is steered back into the lane.
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel
LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering wheel
vibrations
1
.
If the vehicle passes a side line, the Lane Keep-
ing Aid warns the driver with pulsing vibrations
in the steering wheel. This occurs regardless of
whether the car is actively steered back by
applying a slight steering torque.
Dynamic cornering
LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows
the car to cross side lines without engaging
active steering or warning with pulsing vibra-
tions in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent
lane for dynamic cornering when there is a
clear line of vision is an example of one such
case.
1
The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
182
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
The function is supplemented with self-explan-
atory graphics in different situations. Here are
some examples:
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long
as the direction indicator is switched on.
LKA "sees" the following side lines.
If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and
detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol
is shown with WHITE lines.
•
GREY side line – the Lane Keeping Aid
does not see a line on that side of the car.
LKA engages on the right side.
The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers
away from the side line - this is indicated with:
•
RED line for the side in question.
Limitations
•
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human
eye. For more information, see page 171.
NOTE
In certain demanding situations LKA may
find it difficult to assist the driver correctly -
in which case it is recommended that LKA
is switched off.
Examples of such a situation could be:
•
roadworks
•
winter road conditions
•
poor road surface
•
very sporty driving style
•
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
driver must have his/her hands on the steering
wheel. LKA continual monitors this. If hands
are not detected on the steering wheel, a text
message encouraging the driver to actively
steer the car is shown.
If the driver does not follow the request to begin
steering, the Lane Keeping Aid goes into
standby mode and will remain in this mode until
the driver begins to steer the car again.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
Symbols and messages
In situations where the LKA function is not
working or is set to standby mode, a message
may be displayed in the instrument panel along
with an explanatory message on the display or
TV screen. If so, follow the given recommen-
dation.
Message examples:
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Lane Keeping Aid Unavail-
able at this speed
The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Keeping Aid Unavail-
able for current markings
The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about
the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Lane Keeping Aid Availa-
ble
The function scans the lane's side lines.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrup-
ted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active
again.
A
The table symbols are schematic. The symbols on the display may have a slightly different appearance.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the
distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR - see page 203.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
Rear only
•
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the tow-
bar is included when the function measures
the parking space.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people and animals
near the car.
Function
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and
CTA
1
.
The system is automatically activated when the
engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car
and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen-
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter
the distance between the car and a detected
obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
1
Side warning, see page 196
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
IMPORTANT
Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossy
poles or low barriers may be in the "signal
shadow" and are then temporarily not
detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone
may then unexpectedly stop instead of
changing over to the expected constant
tone.
•
In which case, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particu-
larly slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects
since the sensors are unable to function
optimally.
Rear parking assistance
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system is automatically deactivated when
reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the
towbar in order to prevent the sensors from
reacting to them.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer cable - Park Assist may need to be
deactivated manually in order that the sen-
sors do not react to the trailer or bike carrier.
Front parking assistance
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeak-
ers.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is illu-
minated in order to indicate that the system is
activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h
the system is reactivated.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors -
the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows
Park assist syst Service
required
then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
IMPORTANT
Under some circumstances, the parking
sensors can give false warning signals due
to external sound sources which emit the
same ultrasound frequencies as those with
which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
General
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu, see
page 203).
The camera image is shown on the centre con-
sole's screen.
WARNING
•
The parking camera is an aid and can
never replace the responsibilities of the
driver when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals near
the car.
Function and operation
CAM button location.
The camera shows what is behind the car and
if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly
- this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the cam-
era image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
external dimensions are illustrated by means of
two dashed lines. These help lines can be
switched off in the settings menu.
If the car is also equipped with parking assis-
tance sensors* then their information is dis-
played graphically as coloured fields in order to
illustrate the distance to detected obstacles,
see page 184.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is par-
ticularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-
played for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will
take when it turns.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the
lines on the display show the route the
car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's
electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the
area behind the car - so pay attention to the
sides and front of the car when turning the
steering while reversing.
Boundary lines
Different lines in the system.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
Cars with reversing sensors*
Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis-
tance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assis-
tance sensors (see page 184) the distance indi-
cation will be more precise and the coloured
areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are reg-
istering an obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreas-
ing distance to the obstacle - from light yellow
to yellow to orange to red.
Colour / paint Distance
(metres)
Light yellow 0.7–1.5
Yellow 0,5–0,7
Colour / paint Distance
(metres)
Orange 0,3–0,5
Red 0–0.3
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown. Make the settings as desired.
Miscellaneous
•
The default setting is that the camera is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
•
One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
•
Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM.
•
If the car has more cameras* installed then
the camera in use is changed by turning
TUNE.
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A help line for the towbar's
intended "course" towards the trailer can be
shown in the display - just as for the "wheel
tracks".
•
The towbar can be zoomed in for precision
manoeuvring with one press on CAM.
Pressing again gives normal view.
The towbar's park assist line is activated in the
menu system MY CAR where a selection can
be made between displaying the "wheel
tracks" or towbar course - both options cannot
be displayed simultaneously.
Limitations
NOTE
Bicycle racks or other accessories mounted
on the back of the car may obscure the line
of sight of the camera.
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively large
sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles
could thereby go undetected until they are very
close to the car.
To bear in mind
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-
warm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The On/Off button is on the centre console.
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot)
helps the driver to park by first checking
whether a space is sufficiently large and then
turning the steering wheel and steering the car
into the space. Symbols, graphics and text in
the combined instrument panel display show
when various things are to be done.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the tow-
bar is included when the function measures
the parking space.
WARNING
PAP does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always has the final responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
for paying attention to the surroundings and
other road users approaching or passing
during parking.
Function
The PAP function turns the steering wheel - the
driver's job is to select a gear, control the
speed and brake.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria
are met once the engine has been started:
•
The functions DSTC or ABS must not inter-
fere while the PAP function is enabled -
these can be activated due to a steep or
slippery surface, for example: see pages
129 and 138 for more information.
•
Trailers must not be connected to the car.
•
The speed must be below 50 km/h.
Principle for PAP.
The PAP function parks the car using the fol-
lowing steps:
1. The function searches for a parking space
and measures it (A & B). During measure-
ment, speed must not exceed 30 km/h.
2. The car is steered into the space while
reversing (C & D).
3. The car is straightened up in the space by
driving back and forth (E & F).
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
Operation
The driver is instructed by means of simple,
clear instructions on the instrument panel -
using both graphics and text.
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel posi-
tions may obstruct the instrument panel's
instructions when you turn it during the
parking manoeuvre.
1 - Searching and checking
measurements
The PAP function searches for a parking space
and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed
as follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button and do not drive
faster than 30 km/h.
2. Keep an eye on the instrument panel dis-
play and be prepared to stop the car when
the graphics and text so request.
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so
request.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for a parking space,
displays instructions and guides the car in
on its passenger side. But if required the car
can also be parked on the driver's side of
the street:
•
Activate the direction indicator for the
driver's side - the car is then parked on
that side of the street instead.
2 - Reversing in
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the
car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
touching the steering wheel - and no faster
than approx. 10 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel dis-
play and be prepared to stop the car when
the graphics and text so request.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steer-
ing wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
•
For optimum results - Wait until the
steering wheel has been turned before
starting to drive backwards/forwards.
3 - Straightening up
When the car has reversed into the parking
space, it must be straightened up and stopped.
1.
Engage first gear or D position, wait until
the steering wheel has been turned, then
drive slowly forwards.
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text
message so request.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards
slowly until the graphics and text message
tell you to stop.
The function is disengaged automatically when
parking is complete, and the graphics and text
message show that parking is complete. It may
be necessary for the driver to correct the posi-
tioning. Only the driver can determine whether
the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by Active Park Assist
compared with when Park Assist uses the
sensors.
Limitations
The PAP sequence is stopped:
•
if the car is driven too quickly - more than
30 km/h
•
if the driver touches the steering wheel
•
if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled -
e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
•
if a passenger door is opened - but the
driver's door may be opened.
A text message indicates where the PAP
sequence was stopped.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference
with the sensors from external sound
sources which emit the same ultrasound
frequencies as those with which the system
works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
To bear in mind
The driver should bear in mind that the Park
Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fully-
automatic function. The driver must therefore
be prepared to intervene. There are also details
to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
•
PAP works based on the positioning of
parked vehicles. If these are not properly
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
parked, the car could end up on the side-
walk or improperly parked in some other
way.
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets, not sharp curves or bends.
•
It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is not
enough space for manoeuvring. In such
parking situations, it helps the system to
drive as close to the side of the road as
possible where you intend to park.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while
being parked.
•
Objects situated higher than the detection
areas of the sensors are not included when
calculations are made for the parking
manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing
into the parking space too early.
•
The driver is responsible for determine
whether the space selected by PAP is suit-
able for parking.
•
Use approved tyres
1
with the correct tyre
pressure as this affects PAP's ability to
park the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system
to measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro-
truding from the car.
Maintenance
Besides the front and rear Park assist bumper sen-
sors, PAP also uses a sensor on either side of the
front screen.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and
car shampoo - these are the same sensors as
are used by parking assistance (see page 186)
plus one side sensor.
Symbols and messages
The instrument panel display can show differ-
ent combinations of symbols and text with
varying content - sometimes with a self-
explanatory piece of advice on appropriate
action.
If a message says that PAP is disengaged,
contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
1
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those mounted when the car was delivered from the factory.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on BLIS and CTA
The BLIS function (Blind Spot Information
System) is designed for driving in dense traffic
on roads with several lanes in the same direc-
tion. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide
a warning about:
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
•
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a
driver's aid intended to provide a warning
about:
•
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS and CTA are a supplement - not a
replacement for a safe driving style and the
use of rearview and door mirrors. The BLIS
and CTA functions can never replace driver
responsibility and attention.
It is always the responsibility of the driver to
change lanes and reverse in a safe way.
Operation
Position of the BLIS lamp
1
.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
Function
BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine is
started. This is confirmed by the indicator
lamps in the door panels flashing once.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti-
vated by pressing the BLIS button on the cen-
tre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR
2
:
•
Select On or Off at Settings Car
settings
BLIS.
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
2
For information on the menu system - see page 203.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp
in the button goes out/illuminates and the
instrument panel display confirms the change
with a text message. The door panel indicator
lamps flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds – the message
extinguishes.
When BLIS operates
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
approx. 10 km/h.
The system is designed to react when:
•
the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
•
another vehicle is quickly approaching the
vehicle
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door
panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant
glow. If the driver activates the direction indi-
cator on the same side as the warning, the BLIS
lamp will change from a constant glow to flash-
ing with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Activate/deactivate CTA
In cars equipped with parking assistance (see
page 184), the CTA function can be deacti-
vated/activated with the PAS button:
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR
2
menu system as follows:
•
Go to Settings Car settings BLIS
Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The
CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS
remains activated.
2
For information on the menu system - see page 203.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When CTA operates
Principle for CTA - .
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during
reversing, such as when reversing out of a
parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions, it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is acti-
vated automatically when reverse is selected at
the gearbox.
•
If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
sounds. The signal comes from either the
left or the right speaker depending on
which direction the approaching object is
coming from.
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the
form of a lit icon in the TV screen's PAS
graphics.
WARNING
CTA does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Maintenance
Location of BLIS and CTA sensors.
The BLIS and CTA sensors are located inside
the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Limitations
•
BLIS and CTA are deactivated when a
trailer is connected to the car’s electrical
system.
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
ble to provide warnings. BLIS and CTA are
unable to detect hazards if covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents must only be performed by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
Messages on the display
In situations where the BLIS and CTA functions
fail or are interrupted, a symbol may be shown
on the instrument panel, supplemented by an
explanatory message. Follow any recommen-
dation given.
Message examples:
Message Specification
BLIS ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
BLIS and CTA
Service required
BLIS and CTA are
not working.
•
Visit a workshop
if the message
remains - an
authorised
Volvo workshop
is recom-
mended.
BLIS and CTA OFF
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA are
temporarily disabled
because a trailer is
connected to the
car’s electrical sys-
tem.
Message Specification
BLIS OFF
BLIS and CTA have
been deactivated
manually.
CTA OFF
CTA has been deac-
tivated manually.
BLIS is active.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction
indicator stalk.
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menus and messages........................................................................... 200
Menu source MY CAR.......................................................................... 203
Climate control...................................................................................... 212
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* 223
Additional heater*.................................................................................. 227
Trip computer........................................................................................ 229
Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 233
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 234
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Combined instrument panel
1
Information display (analogue combined instru-
ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK - access the menu, acknowledge mes-
sages and confirm menu selections.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET - reset data in the selected trip
computer step and go back in the menu
structure.
The menus shown on the information display
in the combined instrument panel are con-
trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 79. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be
shown.
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Additional heater*
TC options
Service status
Oil level
2
Messages (##)
3
Digital combined instrument panel
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages
Oil level
2
Preconditioning*
Trip computer reset
Message
Text message in the information display (analogue
combined instrument panel).
When a warning, information or indicator sym-
bol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault has been rectified.
1
See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel.
2
Certain engines.
3
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
201
Press OK to acknowledge
4
and browse among
the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press OK) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a
workshop
B
.
Stop engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a
workshop
B
.
Service urgent
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immedi-
ately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Message Specification
See manual
A
Read the owner's man-
ual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a
workshop
B
.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service
- contact a workshop
B
.
The timing is deter-
mined by the number of
kilometres driven, num-
ber of months since the
last service, engine run-
ning time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts - contact a work-
shop
B
.
Transmission
Oil change nee-
ded
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Message Specification
Transmission
Reduced per-
formance
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until the
message clears
C
.
If shown repeatedly -
contact a workshop
B
.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clears
C
.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Wait for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the
car immediately in a
safe manner and con-
tact a workshop
B
.
4
A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
202
Message Specification
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset auto-
matically while driving
or after starting again.
Low battery
charge Power
save mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the bat-
tery.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
C
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 119.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
``
203
General information on MY CAR
Many of the car's functions are handled
in this menu source, such as setting the
clock, door mirrors and locks.
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons on the centre console or with the steer-
ing wheel's right-hand keypad.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
Operation
Centre console controls
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the high-
lighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following occurs:
•
phone call is rejected
•
current function is interrupted
•
input characters are deleted
•
most recent selections are undone
•
leads up in the menu system.
Short and long presses can also produce vary-
ing results.
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(Parent view), from which all of the car's func-
tions/menu sources can be accessed; see
page 243.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
204
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Steering wheel keypad*
The keypad may vary depending on the audio
level; see page 240.
Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/
down among the menu options.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the
highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page
203).
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of
the centre console display screen. Search
paths to the menu system functions are descri-
bed in this manual in the following form:
Settings
Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the steer-
ing wheel keypad:
1.
Press the centre console button MY CAR.
2.
Scroll to the desired menu, e.g.
Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the
thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3.
Scroll to the desired menu, e.g.
Car
settings
and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
4.
Scroll to
Lock settings and press the
thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
5.
Scroll to
Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
functions opens.
6.
Choose between the options
All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the
option's empty box.
7. Exit the programming by backing out of the
menus incrementally with short presses on
EXIT (2) or with one long press.
The procedure is the same as with the centre
console's buttons - see page 203: OK MENU
(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
MY CAR
The following options are available in menu
source
MY CAR:
•
My V40
•
Trip statistics
•
DRIVe*
•
Support systems
•
Settings
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
My V40
MY CAR My V40
The display screen shows a grouping of all of
the car's driver support systems - these can be
activated or deactivated here.
My DRIVe*
Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are described
here, amongst other things.
•
Start/Stop
•
Eco driving guide
For more information - see page 123.
Driver support system
MY CAR Support systems
The display screen shows a summary of the
current status of the car's driver support sys-
tems.
Setup - menus
The menus are structured as follows:
Menu level 1
Menu level 2
Menu level 3
Menu level 4
p. ....
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under
MY CAR
Settings. Some menus have fur-
ther submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/
On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
•
Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
Car settings
Car key memory
On
Off
p. 82
and
104
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
206
Lock settings
Automatic door locking
On
Off
Doors unlock
All doors
Driver door, then
all
Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same
side
Both front doors
Audible confirmation
On
Off
p. 44,
52 and
55
Reduced Guard
Activate once
Ask when exiting
p. 58
and 62
Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror
Tilt right mirror
p. 104
Light settings
Interior light
Floor lights
Ambient light
Ambient light
colours
p. 94
Door lock confirmation
light
On
Off
Unlock confirmation light
On
Off
p. 42
Approach light duration
Off
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
p. 44
and 95
Home safe light duration
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
p. 95
Triple indicator
On
Off
p. 93
Temporary LH traffic
On
Off
or
Temporary RH traffic
On
Off
p. 95
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
Active bending lights
On
Off
p. 91
Auxiliary lights
On
Off
p. 87
Steering wheel force
Low
Medium
High
p. 233
Speed in infotainment display
On
Off
Reset car settings
All menus in Car settings are
given original factory settings.
Driver support systems
Collision Warning
On
Off
Warning distance
Long
Normal
Short
Warning sound
On
Off
p. 167
Lane Keeping Aid
On
Off
On at start-up
On
Off
Increased sensitivity*
On
Off
Assistance alternatives
Vibration only
Steering assist
only
Full function
p. 180
Road Sign Information
On
Off
Speed alert
On
Off
p. 141
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
208
DSTC
On
Off
p. 138
City Safety
On
Off
p. 161
BLIS
On
Off
Cross Traffic Alert
On
Off
p. 194
Distance Alert
On
Off
p. 158
Driver Alert
On
Off
p. 176
System options
Time
The instrument panel clock is set
here.
p. 75
Time format
12 h
24 h
p. 75
Screen saver
On
Off
The TV screen's current content
fades out after a period of inac-
tivity and is replaced by a blank
screen if this option is selected.
The current screen content
returns if any of the TV screen's
buttons or controls are actuated.
p. 203
Language
Selects language for menu texts.
Show help text
On
Off
Explanatory text for the display
screen's current content is shown
with this option selected.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km
p. 229
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Selects the unit for the display of
outside temperature and setting
of the climate control system.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume
Rear park assist volume
Phone ringing volume
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
209
Reset system options
All menus in System options are
given original factory settings.
Voice settings
Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav-
igator RTI* - see separate manual.
Voice tutorial
This menu option + OK provides
spoken information about how
the system works.
Voice command list
Phone commands
Phone
Phone call con-
tact
Phone dial num-
ber
Navigation commands
Navigation
Navigation
repeat instruc-
tion
Navigation go to
address
General commands
Help
Cancel
Voice tutorial
The menu options under
Phone
commands
show several exam-
ples of available voice commands
- only with a Bluetooth
-enabled
mobile phone installed. For more
and detailed information - see
page 267.
The menu options under
Naviga-
tion commands
show several
examples of available voice com-
mands in the Navigation system.
Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2
Here there is the option to create
a second user profile - an advant-
age if more than one person shall
use the car/system regularly.
Default setting restores factory
settings.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
210
Voice training
User 1
User 2
With
Voice training the voice
recognition system is taught to
recognise the driver's voice and
pronunciation. A number of phra-
ses are presented on the screen
for the driver to read aloud. When
the system has learnt how the
driver talks, the presentation of
the phrases stops. Following
which e.g.
User 1 can be
selected in
Voice user setting in
order that the system shall listen
to the right user.
Voice output volume
A volume control appears on the
screen - at which point, proceed
as follows:
1. Adjust the volume with the
thumbwheel.
2.
Test-listen using OK.
3.
Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.
Voice POI list
Edit list
The number of facilities is exten-
sive and varies depending on
market. Maximum 30 favourite
facilities can be stored in this list.
For more information on Facilities
and Voice recognition - see the
Navigation system's owner's
manual.
Audio settings
p. 240
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjustment
Normal
High
Low
Recirculation timer
On
Off
Automatic rear defroster
On
Off
Interior air quality system
On
Off
Reset climate settings
All menus in
Climate settings
are given original factory settings.
p. 217
Favourites (FAV)
p. 244
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
Number of keys
p. 42
VIN number
p. 366
DivX® VOD code
p. 260
Bluetooth software version in
car
p. 266
Map and software version*
Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav-
igator - see separate manual.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
212
General
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas-
senger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compart-
ment and to prevent the windows from mist-
ing, it should always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means
1
that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
Sensor location
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is located
in the door mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-
mally, the side windows must be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-
dows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 55.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
1
Only applies to ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. The
function starts when required and is dis-
engaged automatically after a time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need
up until the car is 4 years old.
•
The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto-
matic system that cleans the air in the pas-
senger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with
CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after
15 000 km or once per year depending on
whichever occurs first. However, up to
75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP
and where the customer does not want to
retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter
must be replaced during a regular service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-
partment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 359.
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for four of the climate con-
trol system's functions via the centre console.
For general information about menu naviga-
tion, see page 204:
•
Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
page 218.
•
Recirculation timer for passenger com-
partment air, see page 220.
•
Automatic rear window defrosting, see
page 105.
•
Air quality system IAQS*, see page 220
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu sys-
tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings
Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
Air distribution
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
214
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 221.
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove
misting.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
Electronic climate control, ECC*
Fan
AUTO
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 105
Setting, left/right side for temperature reg-
ulation
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
Temperature control
Recirculation
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
216
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
Fan
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 105
Recirculation
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
Temperature control
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
217
Operating the controls
Heated seats*
Front seats
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
TV screen.
Press the button once for the
highest heat level - three
orange fields are lit in the cen-
tre console TV screen (see fig-
ure above).
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two orange fields are lit in the
TV screen.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one orange field it lit in the TV screen.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no fields are lit.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating the
controls for the heated seats. Otherwise
they may suffer burn injuries.
Rear seat
Press the button once for the highest heat level
– three lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level –
two lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
Fan
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob for ECC*
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed, AUTO is
disengaged. If AUTO is
selected, the fan speed is
regulated automatically - the
fan speed previously set is
disengaged.
Fan knob for ETC
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
218
Air distribution
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the TV screen (see figure
below) and an arrow in front of each part of the
figure shows the air distribution that is
selected. For more information on air distribu-
tion, see page 221.
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre
console TV screen.
AUTO
1
The Auto function automati-
cally regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. All manual settings are disengaged
when AUTO is pressed. The TV screen shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under: Settings
Climate settings
Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between
Low, Normal
or High:
•
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
•
Normal - Automatic fan control.
•
High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 204.
Temperature control
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
1
Only applies to ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
219
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Temperature regulation ECC*
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Repeatedly press L/R in the
button to select the setting for
left, right or both sides. Set
the temperature using the
knob - the selected temperature for either side
is displayed in the centre console display.
Temperature regulation ETC
The temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be
adjusted with the knob.
AC – Air conditioning on/off
When the lamp in the AC but-
ton illuminates, the air condi-
tioning is controlled by the
system's automatic function.
This way, incoming air is
cooled and dehumidified as
required.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off
the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automati-
cally, so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi-
mum setting.
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
The selected setting is shown in the centre con-
sole TV screen.
Electric heating*
Max. defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows.
The light in the defroster but-
ton illuminates when the func-
tion is active.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
220
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For cars without heated windscreens:
•
One press on the button makes air flow to
the windows - symbol (2) shines in the dis-
play.
•
Two presses switches off the function - no
symbol shines.
For cars with heated windscreens, the function
operates as follows:
•
One press on the button starts heating the
windscreen
2
- symbol (1) shines in the dis-
play.
•
Two presses on the button start heating
the windscreen
2
and air flows to the win-
dows - the symbols (1) and (2) shine in the
display.
•
Three presses switches off the function -
no symbol shines.
The following also takes place when the func-
tion is active in order to provide maximum
dehumidification in the passenger compart-
ment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is oper-
ating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates. The
function is selected to shut
out bad air, exhaust gases
etc. from the passenger com-
partment. The air in the pas-
senger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no
outside air is taken into the car when this func-
tion is activated.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings
Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 204.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
tion is always deactivated.
Air quality system IAQS*
The air quality system separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. If the
outside air is contaminated then the air intake
is closed and the air is recirculated.
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings
Climate
settings
Interior air quality system. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 204.
2
The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena-
bled to ensure the best air in the passenger
compartment.
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is
limited so as to prevent misting.
Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
With an auto-stopped engine certain equip-
ment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g.
climate control air conditioning and fan speed.
For more information, see page 123.
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
A large amount of hot air
flows to the windows.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and win-
dows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via
defroster vent, and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low
fan speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from
dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
222
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard
air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows,
from dashboard air
vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air
along the floor or warmer
air higher up in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
223
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the
parking heater is switched off. When it is
running, the information display shows
Auto heater ON
1
.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears on the information display. Acknowl-
edge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk OK button once, see page 224.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-
bined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
1
Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
224
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Information display (analogue combined instru-
ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET
For more information on the information dis-
play and OK, see pages 69 and 200.
Symbols and display messages
2
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-
nated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
NOTE
G02510
2
- Figure 2 in the symbol means the
second climate control system in the car,
where the normal climate control system is
the first. The figure 2 has nothing to do with
the timer.
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G02510
2
Auto
heater
ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
The heater's timer
is activated after
the remote control
key has been
removed from the
ignition switch and
leaving the car -
the engine and
passenger com-
partment are
heated at the set
time.
G02510
2
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Battery
saving
mode
The heater has
been stopped by
the car's electron-
ics in order to facil-
itate starting the
engine.
2
Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
225
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G025102
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater
is not possible due
to fuel level being
too low - this is in
order to facilitate
starting the engine
as well as
approx. 50 km
driving.
G025102
Fuel
operated
heater
Service
required
Heater not work-
ing. Contact a
workshop for
repair. Volvo rec-
ommends that you
contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk OK
button.
Direct start and immediate stop
Following the direct start of the heater it will be
activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Parking
heater
3
and select with OK.
2.
In the next menu, scroll to
Direct start and
select with OK to activate/deactivate.
3.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Heater timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Setting the timer
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Parking
heater
3
and select with OK.
2. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3.
Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours
setting.
4. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
5.
Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes
setting.
6. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
7.
Press OK
4
to confirm the setting.
8. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
9. Select the other time (continue from step 2)
or exit the menu with RESET.
Start the timer
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Parking
heater
3
and select with OK.
2. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3.
Activate the marked timer with OK.
3
Analogue combined instrument panel.
4
Press OK again to activate the timer.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
226
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivating the timer
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1.
Press OK.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Parking
heater
3
and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated, a clock
icon is shown next to the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
•
long press on OK or
•
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer and
confirm with OK.
A timer-started heater can be switched off as
described in the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop"; see page
225.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
3
Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
General information about the
additional heater
For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli-
mate zones
1
an additional heater may be
required to obtain the correct operating tem-
perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient
heating in the passenger compartment.
In such instances, the car is equipped with
either:
•
an additional electric heater or
•
a fuel-driven additional heater
2
.
Electric additional heater
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
tures below 9 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
been reached.
Fuel-driven additional heater
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the auxiliary heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required.
Information display (analogue combined instru-
ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi-
tion I, see page 80.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Additional
heat auto
.
3.
Press RESET to select between
ON and
OFF.
1
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
2
For cars fitted with parking heaters, see page 223.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
05
228
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
General
The trip computer comes in two variants, with
differing content and appearance – "Analog" or
"Digital".
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop.
One of the "Analog" menu options is a blank
display - it also marks the beginning/end of the
loop. With this option in the "Digital" instrument
panel, the two trip computer displays go blank.
"Analog" instrument panel
"Analog" information display with controls.
OK – Opens the trip computer menus and
activates the relevant option.
Thumbwheel – Scroll among trip control
options.
RESET – Cancel or go back one step.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must
first be acknowledged before the trip com-
puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge the
warning message by briefly pressing the
indicator lever's OK button.
Menu options Information
Digital speed
Select "km/h" or
"mph".
Parking heater*
- Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to
the menu for select-
ing time.
- Timer 2 - leads to
the menu for select-
ing time.
1. Select the box
for Hours or
Minutes using
the thumb-
wheel and acti-
vate the box
with OK.
2. Select a number
using the
thumbwheel
and program it
with OK.
3. Select the next
box or back out
with RESET.
For more informa-
tion, see page 223.
Menu options Information
Additional heater*
–
Auto On
– Off
For more informa-
tion, see page 227.
TC options
Distance to empty
,
km to empty tank
–
Fuel consump-
tion
– Average speed
- Trip meter T1 and
total dist.
- Trip meter T2 and
total dist.
– Driver Support
- No text - Loop
start/stop
Select the option to
be shown in the dis-
play.
•
Scroll among
the options
using the
thumbwheel
and select with
OK.
Service status
Shows the number
of months and the
distance until the
next service.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menu options Information
Engine oil level
Wait...
A
For more informa-
tion, see page 331.
Messages
For more informa-
tion, see page 200.
A
Certain engines.
"Digital" instrument panel
"Digital" information display with controls.
OK – Opens the trip computer menus and
activates the relevant option.
Thumbwheel – Scroll among trip control
options.
RESET – Cancel or go back one step.
In the "Digital" display version, two trip com-
puter functions can be displayed simultane-
ously – one function in the left and one in the
right display.
The following combinations can be accessed
with the thumbwheel:
•
"Average consumption" and "Average
speed
"
•
"Current consumption" and "Distance to
empty fuel tank:
"
•
"Current consumption" and "Digital speed
display"
•
No text - Loop start/stop
Menu options Information
Trip computer
reset
- l/100 km
- km/h
- Reset both
Select the desired
option using the
thumbwheel and
activate with OK.
Messages
For more informa-
tion, see page 200.
Themes
Instrument panel
appearance is
selected here, see
page 70.
Menu options Information
Settings*
–
Additional
heater
Select Auto On or
Off.
For more informa-
tion, see page 227.
Contrast mode/
Colour mode
Adjust instrument
panel appearance.
Parking heater*
–
Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to
the menu for select-
ing time.
- Timer 2 - leads to
the menu for select-
ing time.
1. Select the box
for Hours or
Minutes using
the thumb-
wheel and acti-
vate the box
with OK.
2. Select a number
using the
thumbwheel
and program it
with OK.
3. Select the next
box or back out
with RESET.
For more informa-
tion, see page 223.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
Menu options Information
Service status
Shows the number
of months and the
distance until the
next service.
Engine oil level
Wait...
A
For more informa-
tion, see page 331.
A
Certain engines.
Functions
A description of a few trip computer functions
is found below:
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
Average speed
Average speed is calculated from the last
resetting.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "
----" appears on the display.
Cars with the Start/Stop function show "0,0 L/
100km" when the engine is in auto-stop mode.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information
on how fuel consumption can be influenced,
see page 10.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "
---- km to empty tank". Refuel as
soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
Digital speed display
1
The speed is shown in the opposite unit (kmh/
mph) of the main instrument panel. If the
speedometer indicates speed in mph, the dis-
play is changed to km/h.
Resetting with "Analog"
1.
Select
--- km/h average speed or --.- l/
100km average
.
2. A brief press (approx. 1 second) on
RESET resets the selected function.
Resetting with "Digital"
Find "Reset" in the menu system and select
that option.
"Reset" is also activated via a long press (4
seconds) on RESET. The displayed trip meter
(T1 or T2) is also reset.
Changing unit
To change unit (metric/imperial) for distance
and speed - go to MY CAR
Settings
System options Distance and fuel units,
see page 203.
NOTE
In addition to the trip computer, these units
are also changed at the same time in Volvo's
GPS navigator RTI.
1
For "Digital" instrument panel only.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
232
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip statistics*
The car stores information on completed trips,
including average fuel consumption and aver-
age speed. These can be viewed on the TV
screen as a block diagram.
Function
Trip statistics.
Each block symbolises 1 km or 10 km, depend-
ing on which scale is selected. The diagram
displays 10 blocks: Blocks 1-9 show the last
9 or 90 km driven - the block at the far right
shows the value of the kilometre or 10 km cur-
rent being driven.
With the TUNE wheel, the scale of each block
can be switched between 1 km and 10 km - the
cursor at the far right shifts position between
up and down depending on the scale selected.
Operation
A setting can be made in the MY CAR menu
system:
MY CAR
My V40 Trip statistics:
•
Start new trip - ENTER is used to clear all
previous statistics. Back out of the menu
with EXIT.
•
Reset for every driving cycle - mark the
box with ENTER and back out of the menu
with EXIT.
With the "
Reset for every driving cycle"
option marked, all statistics are automatically
cleared after the car is parked and stationary
for 4 hours. The next time the engine is started,
trip statistics start again from zero.
If a new driving cycle is started before the
4 hours have elapsed, the current period must
first be deleted manually using the "
Start new
trip
" option.
See also the information on Eco Guide on page
121.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system
MY CAR and locate Settings
Car settings
Steering wheel force and select Low,
Medium or High.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
234
Storage spaces
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
Storage compartment
1
in door panel
Storage compartment, driver’s side
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
Glovebox
Storage pocket*
2
on front edge of front
seat cushions
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage pocket
2
Storage compartment, rear seat
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other com-
partments. Otherwise they may injure peo-
ple in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
Storage compartment, driver’s side
WARNING
Do not keep any sharp objects in the com-
partment, or objects which protrude.
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passen-
ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are
specified then there is a cigarette lighter in
the 12 V socket for the front seat, see
page 236, and a detachable ashtray in the
cup holder.)
Armrest
When closed, the armrest can be adjusted*
longitudinally.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
1
With ice scraper holder on the driver’s side.
2
Not applicable to textile upholstery.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
236
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Glovebox
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked* using the key blade, see pages 46
and 56.
Cooling
3
The glovebox can also be used as a cooled
area.
Start cooling by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment to
the end position.
Switch off the cooling by moving the con-
trol forwards to the end position.
Cooling is active when the climate control sys-
tem is active, i.e. when the key is in position II
or the engine is running.
Inlay mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
12 V socket
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The electrical sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the
sockets to supply current, the remote control
key must be in at least key position I, see
page 79.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
3
Applicable only to cars with ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
TV screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote con-
trol key has been removed or when the car
is locked, for example, when the parking
heater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the
battery could be drained in the event of such
an occurrence!
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either
socket.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 320.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 296.
238
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on infotainment..................................................... 240
Radio..................................................................................................... 250
Media player......................................................................................... 257
External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................... 261
Media Bluetooth
* ................................................................................ 264
Bluetooth
handsfree*.......................................................................... 267
Voice recognition* mobile phone.......................................................... 275
TV*......................................................................................................... 279
Remote control* ................................................................................... 282
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
240
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The Infotainment system consists of a radio,
media player, TV* and the option to communi-
cate with a mobile phone*. Information is pre-
sented on a 5 or 7-inch* colour screen in the
upper section of the centre console. Functions
can be controlled via buttons in the steering
wheel, under the colour display in the centre
console or via a remote control*. The mobile
phone can also be voice-controlled in certain
cases.
If the Infotainment System is active when the
engine is switched off then it is automatically
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door must
be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
The infotainment system can be used for 15
minutes at a time without the remote control
key being in the ignition switch by pressing the
On/Off button.
When the car is being started the infotainment
system is switched off temporarily and contin-
ues when the engine has started.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the infotainment system is
used when the engine is switched off. This
is to avoid discharging the battery unnec-
essarily.
Dolby, Pro Logic
1
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Audyssey MultEQ
1
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
in the development and tuning of the sound to
ensure a world-class sound experience.
1
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
Overview
AUX
2
and USB
3
inputs for external audio
sources (e.g. iPod
)
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without
thumbwheel).
TV screen. The TV screen is available in
two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows
a 7-inch TV screen.
Centre console control panel
Operating the system
Scroll/fast forward/search - A short
press scrolls among tracks or preset radio sta-
tions
4
. A long press fast forwards through disc
tracks or searches for the next available radio
station.
SOUND - press for access to audio settings
(bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see
page 245.
VOL - raise or lower volume.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts the
system and long press (until the screen is off)
switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensus
system (including navigation * and phone func-
tions*) starts/switches off at the same time.
Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) or
restore the sound if it had been switched off.
Main sources - press to select the main
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active
source is shown (e.g. FM1). A new source view
is selected if the main source button is pressed
while in RADIO or MEDIA. If you are in TEL* or
NAV* and press the main source button then a
shortcut menu is shown with commonly used
menu options.
2
Applicable to Performance only
3
Not applicable to Performance
4
Does not apply to DAB.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
242
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the
steering wheel or the button in the centre con-
sole to accept a menu selection. If OK/MENU
is pressed while in the normal view, a menu for
the selected source opens (e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen is
shown when there are underlying menus.
TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steering
wheel or the knob in the centre console to scroll
among tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations,
phone contacts* or to navigate among choices
on the TV screen.
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the
menu system, interrupts current function, inter-
rupts/rejects phone calls or erases entered
characters. A long press leads to the normal
view or, if already in the normal view, to the
highest menu level (main source view). From
there you can reach the same main source but-
tons as those on the centre console (4).
INFO - If more information than can be
shown on the screen is available, press the
INFO button to see the remaining information.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and let-
ters.
FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
button can be programmed for a commonly
used function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor-
mation, see page 244.
MUTE
5
- press to switch off the radio/media
audio or restore the audio if it has been
switched off.
Voice recognition
6
- press to activate
voice recognition (for mobile phone and navi-
gation system connected via Bluetooth
*).
5
Cars without navigation.
6
Cars with navigation*.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
``
243
Menus
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/source menu, (4) Quick
menu, (5) Source menu
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select main source by pressing a main source
button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigate
through the source menus, use the con-
trolsTUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main
source button (1).
For Menu overview, see page 246.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be
used instead of the controls in the centre
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), see
page 241.
Menus and views in the TV screen
The appearance depends on the source,
equipment in the car, settings, etc.
Main source button - press to switch the
main source or to show the Shortcut/Source
menu in the active source.
Normal view - normal mode for the source.
Shortcut/Source menu - shows com-
monly used menu options in the main sources,
e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing
the active source's main source button (1)).
Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is
turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio sta-
tion, etc.
Source menu - for menu navigation
(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
FAV - store a preset
The FAV button can be used to store functions
that are used frequently so that the function
can be started simply by pressing FAV. You
can select a favourite (e.g.
Equalizer) for each
function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
•
AM
•
FM1/FM2
•
DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:
•
DISC
•
USB*
•
iPod*
•
Bluetooth*
•
AUX
•
TV*
It is also possible to select and store a favourite
for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites can
also be selected and stored under MY CAR.
For more information on the menu system MY
CAR, see page 203.
To store a function in the FAV button:
1.
Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA).
2.
Select a wavelength or source (
AM, Disc,
etc.).
3.
Press and hold the FAV button until the
"favourites menu" is shown.
4.
Turn TUNE to select an option from the list
and press OK/MENU to save.
>
When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA) is active the stored function is
available via a short press on FAV.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings
menu (
Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the setting with OK/MENU.
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options:
•
Surround
7
- Can be set to the On/Off posi-
tion. When On is selected, the system
selects the setting for optimal sound repro-
duction. Normally DPLII and
then
appear in the TV screen. If the recording is
made with Dolby Digital technology then
playback will take place with this setting,
then appears in the TV screen.
When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is
available.
•
Bass - Bass level.
•
Treble - Treble level.
•
Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
•
Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
•
Subwoofer*
7
- Bass speaker level.
•
DPL II centre level3 channel centre
level
7
- Volume for centre speaker.
•
DPL II surround level
7, 8
– Level for sur-
round.
Advanced audio settings
Equalizer
9
The volume level can be adjusted separately
for different wavelengths.
1.
Press OK/MENU to access
Audio
settings
and select Equalizer.
2.
Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con-
tinue in the same way with other wave-
lengths you want to change.
4. When you have finished with audio set-
tings, press EXIT to confirm and return to
normal view.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Sound stage
7
The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
If there are passengers in both the front and
rear seats then the option recommended is;
both front seats. The options can be selected
under Audio settings
Sound stage.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in relation to the speed
of the car. The compensation level can be set
to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
under Audio settings
Volume
compensation.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
External audio source audio volume
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player
or iPod
) is connected to the AUX input then
7
Only Premium Sound Multimedia.
8
Only when Surround is activated.
9
Not Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
246
the audio source that is connected can have a
different volume than the audio system's inter-
nal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjust-
ing the volume of the input:
1.
Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to
AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/
MENU.
2.
Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3.
Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the
AUX input.
NOTE
If the external audio source's volume is too
high or too low, the quality of the sound may
deteriorate. The audio quality may also be
impaired if the player is charged while the
infotainment system is in AUX mode. In
which case, avoid charging the player via
the 12 V socket.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti-
mum sound reproduction by means of digital
signal processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g.
Bass, Treble and Equalizer,
are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
Menu overview
Menus RADIO
Main menu AM
AM menu
Show presets
10
Scan
Audio settings
11
Sound stage
12
Equalizer
13
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM1/FM2
FM menu
TP
Show radio text
Show presets
10
Scan
News settings
10
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
11
The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.
12
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
13
Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
Advanced settings
REG
Alternative frequency
EON
Set TP favourite
PTY settings
Reset all FM settings
Audio settings
14
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
DAB menu
Ensemble learn
PTY filtering
Turn off PTY filtering
Show radio text
Show presets
10
Scan
Advanced settings
DAB linking
DAB band
Sub channels
Show PTY text
Reset all DAB settings
Audio settings
14
Menus MEDIA
Main menu CD Audio
Disc menu
Random
Scan
Audio settings
14
Main menu CD/DVD
10
Data
Disc menu
Play/Pause
Stop
Random
Repeat folder
Change subtitles
Change audio track
Scan
Audio settings
14
Main menu DVD
10
Video
DVD Video Menu
DVD disc menu
Play/Pause/Continue
Stop
Subtitles
Audio tracks
Advanced settings
Angle
DivX® VOD code
Audio settings
14
Main menu iPod
13
iPod menu
Random
Scan
Audio settings
14
Main menu USB
13
USB menu
Play/Pause
14
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
10
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
13
Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Stop
Random
Repeat folder
Select USB device
Change subtitles
Change audio track
Scan
Audio settings
14
Main menu Media Bluetooth
13
Bluetooth menu
Random
Change device
Remove Bluetooth device
Scan
Bluetooth software version in car
Audio settings
14
Main menu AUX
AUX menu
AUX input volume
Audio settings
14
Main menu TV*
TV menu
Select country
Reorganise presets
Autostore
Scan
Audio settings
14
Pop-up menu
15
video and TV*
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order to
access the pop-up menu.
Image settings
Source menu
16
DVD disc menu
17
DVD disc TOP menu
17
Menus TEL
Main menu Bluetooth
handsfree
13
Phone menu
All calls
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
Memory status
Clear phone book
Change phone
Remove Bluetooth device
14
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
13
Does not apply to Performance.
15
Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.
16
What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
17
Only applies to DVD video discs.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
249
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
car
Call options
Auto answer
Voicemail number
Disconnect phone
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
250
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength
(AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
Station presets (0-9)
Confirm your selection or go to the radio
menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Select the desired frequency/station or
navigate in the radio menu by turning
TUNE.
Hold in the button for next/previous avail-
able station. Short press for preset.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
Menus
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Radio AM/FM
Tuning
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
transmitter being far away. Coverage level
can also vary depending on where in the
country you are located.
Automatic tuning
1.
Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desired
wavelength (
AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, press
OK/MENU.
2.
Hold in
/ in the centre console (or
in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio
searches for the next/previous available
station.
Station list
1
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur-
rently receiving. This enables you to find a sta-
tion when you drive into an area where you do
not know the radio stations and their frequen-
cies.
To go to the list and select a station:
1.
Select the desired wavelength (
FM1 or
FM2).
2.
Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
This displays the list of all stations in the
area. The currently tuned station is indi-
cated with enlarged text in the list.
3.
Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station from the list.
4.
Confirm your choice by pressing OK/
MENU.
1
Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
251
NOTE
•
The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
received, not a complete list of all radio
frequencies on the selected wave-
length.
•
If the signal from the currently received
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the station list. If
this occurs, press the
button
(while the station list is shown in the dis-
play screen) in order to change to man-
ual tuning and set a frequency. If the
station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction to
show the list again, and press
to
switch.
The list disappears from the TV screen after a
few seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press the
button in the centre console to change
to manual tuning (or to return from manual tun-
ing to the function for "Station list").
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec-
tion "Station list", page 250). When the station
list is shown, press the
button in the cen-
tre console to change to manual tuning. This
allows you to select a frequency from the list of
all available radio frequencies in the selected
wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one
step in a manual search the frequency is
changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc.
To manually select a station:
1.
Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until
the required frequency band (
AM, FM1
etc.) is displayed, press OK/MENU.
2.
Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the radio
automatically searches for the stations in
the area where you are driving (see previous
section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual tun-
ing (by pressing the
button in the cen-
tre console when the station list was
shown), then the radio remains set in the
function for manual tuning the next time you
switch on the radio. To change back to the
function for "Station list", turn TUNE one
step (to show the complete list of stations)
and press the button
.
Note that if you press
when the sta-
tion list is not shown then INFO is activated.
For more information on this function, see
page 241.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM,
FM1 etc.).
The stored presets are selected using the pre-
set buttons.
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page
250).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few
seconds, the sound disappears during this
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
252
time and returns when the station is stored.
The preset button can now be used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown
2
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu
Show presets or AM menu Show
presets.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
•
Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
•
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 254. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set pro-
gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (
ALARM!),
traffic information (
TP), news (NEWS), and pro-
gramme types (
PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For additional settings of programming inter-
ruptions (
EON Distant and EON Local), see
the section "Enhanced Other Networks –
EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the inter-
rupted audio source, press the OK/MENU to
clear the message.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message
ALARM! appears on the TV screen
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The
TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the preset station can
send traffic information then this is shown by
TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise
TP will be grey.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
TP.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
between the car and the radio station trans-
mitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-
ing one of the options under FM menu
Advanced settings EON:
•
Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
•
Distant
3
– interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa-
tion from the selected station or all stations
within the RDS network.
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu
Advanced
settings
Set TP favourite to change.
2
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
3
Factory settings.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
``
253
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The
NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the
selected station or all stations in the RDS net-
work.
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu
News
settings
Set news favourite to change.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select one or
more programme types, such as pop music
and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set sta-
tion's RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu
Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
An indicator is shown in the TV screen when
PTY is activated.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu
Advanced
settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected pro-
gramme types (PTY) are not reset.
Resetting and removing PTY are performed
under FM menu
Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under
FM menu
Advanced settings PTY
settings
Select PTY.
2.
Go to FM menu
Advanced settings
PTY settings Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
– To continue searching for another broad-
cast of the selected programme types,
press on
or .
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the TV screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
Advanced settings PTY
settings
Show PTY text.
Radio text
4
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the TV screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
Show radio text.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The function selects the strongest transmitter
for the set station. In order to find a strong
transmitter the function may, in exceptional
cases, need to search the entire FM wave-
length.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
4
Only cars with 7-inch screen
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
254
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol
REG shows that the func-
tion is active.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu
Advanced settings REG.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
– The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM menu
Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected
for each respective programme type. If the vol-
ume level is adjusted during the programme
interruption, the new level is saved until the
next programme interruption.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches for avail-
able channels and takes into account any pro-
gramme type filtering. When a station is found,
it is played for approx. 10 seconds before
scanning is resumed. When a station is playing
back it can be saved as a preset in the usual
way, see the section Preset, page 251.
– To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to
FM menu
Scan or AM menu Scan.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio. This system
supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
NOTE
Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca-
tions. If there is no coverage then the mes-
sage
No reception is shown in the display
screen.
Service and Ensemble
•
Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the sys-
tem).
•
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels
on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-
casting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area may be necessary.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Programming is carried out in the menu system
in DAB mode under DAB menu
Ensemble
learn. Programming can also take place as fol-
lows:
1.
Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
>
Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
2.
Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
To navigate in and access the channel group
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
shown in the upper part of the TV screen. When
switching to the new Ensemble the name
changes to the new one.
•
Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allo-
cated. The list can also be filtered using the
selection of programme type (
PTY
filtering
), see below.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
255
Scanning
The function automatically searches the cur-
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 10 sec-
onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta-
tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the
usual way. For more information on presets,
see "Preset" below.
–
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu
Scan to
start scanning.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the pre-
selected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be
selected using the programme type function.
There are a number of different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
that are broadcasting that type.
Programme type is selected in DAB mode
under DAB menu
PTY filtering. Exit this
mode as follows:
–
Press EXIT.
> An indicator is shown in the TV screen
when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is imple-
mented.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made
by means of a long press on the desired preset
button, for more information see page 251. The
stored presets are selected using the preset
buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub-
channels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the main channel is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the sub-
channel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown
5
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions in the DAB standard.
Radio text
Some radio stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion is shown on the TV screen.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
mode under DAB menu
Show radio text.
NOTE
Only one of the functions "Show radio
text
" and "Show presets" can be acti-
vated at a time. If one of them is activated
when the other is already activated, then the
previously activated function is deactivated
automatically. Both functions can be deac-
tivated.
5
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
256
Advanced settings
DAB to DAB link
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio
can go from one channel with poor or no recep-
tion to the same channel in another channel
group with better reception. There may be a
certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced
settings
DAB linking.
Wavelength
DAB can be transmitted on two
6
wavelengths:
•
Band III - covers most areas.
•
LBand - available only in a few areas.
By selecting for example
Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both
Band III and LBand have
been selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced
settings
DAB band.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
gramme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
the
symbol is shown to the left of the chan-
nel name in the TV screen. A subchannel is
indicated by the
- symbol appearing to the left
of the channel name in the TV screen.
Press
to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
Programme type text
Some radio stations broadcast information
about programme type and programme cate-
gory, for information on Programme types –
PTY, see page 253. This information is shown
on the TV screen.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
mode under DAB menu
Advanced
settings
Show PTY text.
Resetting the DAB settings
All DAB settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
– The reset is carried out in DAB mode under
DAB menu
Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
6
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
CD/DVD
1
functions
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
Disc eject
MEDIA button, activates last active media
source. If you are already in a media source
and press the MEDIA button then a short-
cut menu is shown for commonly used
menu options.
Input of numbers and letters.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
for the selected media source by pressing
OK/MENU.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate
through menu options by turning TUNE.
Fast forward/reverse and change disc
track or chapter
2
.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:
•
Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
•
Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files
1
.
•
Pre-recorded DVD video discs
1
.
•
Burned DVD discs
1
with audio and/or video
files.
For more information about the supported for-
mats, see page 260.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Starting playback of a disc
Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until
Disc is displayed, press OK/MENU. If there is
a disc in the media player then the disc starts
playing back automatically, otherwise
Insert
disc
is shown in the TV screen. Then insert a
disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play
back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
the player then the disc's folder structure
needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
of the disc and the quantity of information there
may be a certain delay before playback starts.
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
1
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
2
Only applies to DVD discs.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
258
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ble to pause via the menu system
3
, press OK/
MENU, select
Play/Pause.
Playback and navigation
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm
the selection of the disc track and start play-
back. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist.
A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root
level.
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing
on / on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Burned discs audio/video files
1
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder
structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use
OK/MENU to confirm either selection of sub-
folder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
pressing
/ on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files
1
have the symbol and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the play-
back of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change
4
of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
setting when a disc containing only audio files
or only video files is loaded into the media
player and then plays back these files. How-
ever, the system does not change setting if a
disc containing a mixture of audio and video
files is loaded into the media player, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and
No visual media available
while driving
appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected by
record companies or privately copied audio
files cannot be loaded by the player.
DVD video discs
1
For playback of DVD video discs, see
page 259.
Fast forward/reverse
Hold in the buttons / to fast forward/
rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound
at one speed, while video files are fast forwar-
ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly
press the buttons
/ to increase the fast
3
Does not apply to CD Audio
1
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
4
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
259
forward/rewind speed for video files. Release
the button to return to viewing at normal speed.
Scan
5
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
1.
Press OK/MENU
2.
Turn TUNE to
Scan
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
3.
Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will con-
tinue playing.
Random
5
This function plays the tracks in random order.
To listen to the tracks in random order:
1.
Press OK/MENU
2.
Turn TUNE to
Random
3.
Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by
pressing
/ on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Repeat folder
6
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder over and over again. When the last file
has been played out, playback of the first file
starts again.
1.
Press OK/MENU
2.
Turn TUNE to
Repeat folder
3.
Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Playback of DVD video discs
1
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
menu may appear on the display screen. The
disc menu gives access to additional functions
and settings, such as selecting subtitles, lan-
guage and scene selection.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and
No visual media available
while driving
appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
km/h.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
performed using the number keys in the centre
console as illustrated above.
5
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
6
Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.
1
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
260
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Changing chapter or title
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate through them (if the film is being
played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads
back to the original position (if the film was
being played back then it is restarted). Press
EXIT to access the title list.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/
MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list.
Press OK/MENU to activate the selection and
return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel
the selection and this leads back to the original
position (without any selection being made).
The chapter can also be changed by pressing
on
/ on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Advanced settings
7
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function
can be used to choose from which camera
position a particular scene should be shown.
Go in disc mode to Disc menu
Advanced
settings
Angle.
DivX
Video On Demand
The media player can be registered in order to
play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or
USB. The code for registration can be found in
the menu system MY CAR Settings
Information DivX® VOD code. For general
information on menus, see under MY CAR, see
page 203.
For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.
Picture settings
7
You can adjust the settings (when the car is
stationary) for brightness and contrast.
1.
Press OK/MENU and select
Image
settings
, confirm with OK/MENU.
2.
Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and
confirm with OK/MENU.
3.
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory
settings with the
Reset option.
Compatible file formats
The media player can play back a variety of file
types and is compatible with the formats in the
following table.
NOTE
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus,
CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD
discs and therefore playback cannot be
guaranteed and malfunction may arise.
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA
tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
Audio format
A
CD audio, mp3,
wma
Audio format
B
CD audio, mp3,
wma, aac, m4a
Video format
C
CD video,
DVD video, divx, avi,
asf
A
Applies to Performance.
B
Does not apply to Performance.
C
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
7
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
General
Connection points for external audio sources.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod
or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system
via any of the connections in the centre con-
sole. An audio source connected to the USB
input can then be handled
1
with the car's audio
controls. A device connected via the AUX input
cannot be controlled via the car.
There is a recess in the right-hand rear edge of
the tunnel console where cables can be routed
so that the hatch can be closed without cables
being pinched.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
An iPod
or MP3 player with rechargeable bat-
teries is recharged (when the ignition is on or
the engine is running) if the device is plugged
into the USB connection.
To connect the audio source:
1.
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the required
sound source
USB, iPod or AUX, press
OK/MENU.
>
If USB is selected then
Connect USB is
shown in the TV screen.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's stor-
age compartment (see previous illustra-
tion).
The text
Reading USB is shown in the TV
screen when the system is loading the storage
media's file structure. Depending on the file
structure and number of files there may be
some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPod
models
produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the USB connection,
this is shut off if the USB connection is
short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is
taking too much power (this may happen if
the unit connected does not meet the USB
standard). The USB connection is reactiva-
ted automatically the next time the ignition
is turned on, unless the fault persists.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
1
Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
262
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Playback and navigation
2
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder struc-
ture and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/
MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder
or start of playback of the selected audio/video
file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play-
list or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long
press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
pressing
/ on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files
3
have the symbol and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the play-
back of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change
4
of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
setting when a device containing only audio
files or only video files is connected to the USB
port and then it plays back these files. How-
ever, the system does not change setting if a
device containing a mixture of audio and video
files is connected to the USB port, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
Fast forward/reverse
2
See page 258.
Scan
2
See page 259.
Random
2
See page 259.
Search function
2
The keypad on the control panel in the centre
console can be used to find a filename in the
current folder.
The search function is accessed either by turn-
ing TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by
pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or
character in a search string is entered you get
closer to your search target.
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU.
Repeat folder
5
See page 259.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
ble to pause via the menu system
6
, press OK/
MENU, select
Play/Pause.
Audio sources
USB memory
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
for the system to load storage media that con-
tains anything other than compatible music
files.
2
Only applies to USB and iPod
.
3
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
4
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
5
Only applies to USB.
6
Does not apply to iPod
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
263
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compli-
ant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system
and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi-
mum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder.
The top level, which can handle up to 1000
subfolders/files, is an exception to this.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec-
ommended. This is to avoid mechanical
wear to the USB input and the connected
USB memory stick.
USB hub
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB
connection and thereby connect multiple USB
devices simultaneously. Selection of USB
device is made in
USB mode under USB menu
Select USB device.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in
USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device
mode.
iPod
An iPod
is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's con-
nection cable.
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPod
.
NOTE
When an iPod
is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod
player's
own menu structure.
Compatible file formats via the USB
connection
Audio and video files in the following table are
supported by the system for playback via the
USB connection.
Audio format mp3, wma, aac, m4a
Video format
A
divx, avi, asf
A
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth
*
06
264
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth
1
and can wirelessly play streaming
audio files from external devices with
Bluetooth
, such as mobile phones and PDAs.
Navigation and control of the sound can be
carried out via the centre console buttons or via
the steering wheel keypad*. In some external
devices it is also possible to change tracks
from the device.
To play back the audio the car's media player
must first be set in
Bluetooth mode.
NOTE
The Bluetooth
media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The player should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully com-
patible with the Bluetooth
function in the
car's media player. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
NOTE
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the Bluetooth
function.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Overview
Centre console control panel.
VOL – volume.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod
) is activated automatically. If a
source is activated and you press MEDIA
then a shortcut menu is shown with com-
monly used menu options.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files. Long presses are used to fast
forward and rewind audio files.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
1
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth
*
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
Getting started
Connect an external Bluetooth
device
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg-
istered. The connection is made in the same
way as for the phone, see Connect an external
Bluetooth® device, page 268.
Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth
function is active and the
last external device connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the infotain-
ment system searches for the last device con-
nected its name is shown in the TV screen. To
connect to another device, press EXIT. Con-
nect a new external device, see "Change to
another external device" below.
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices
in the car. However, the device must first have
been paired, see "Connect an external Blue-
tooth® device" above. To change to another
device:
1.
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until
Bluetooth
is displayed, press OK/MENU.
2. Check that the external device is searcha-
ble/visible via Bluetooth
, see the manual
for the external device.
3.
Press OK/MENU.
4.
Turn TUNE to
Change device, and con-
firm with OK/MENU.
> After a while, the external device's name
is shown in the TV screen. If several
external devices have been paired then
these are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by turn-
ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
> Connection of the external device takes
place.
Change audio file by pressing
/ on the
centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Disconnecting the device
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
external device moves out of the infotainment
system's range. For more information on con-
nection, see page 265.
Remove the connected device
1.
Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
2.
Turn TUNE to
Remove Bluetooth
device
and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning
TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is shown
in the TV screen.
4.
Press OK/MENU to confirm.
EXIT cancels.
Random
2
This function plays back the audio files on the
external device in random order. Activate/
deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
mode under Bluetooth menu
Random.
Change audio file by pressing
/ on the
centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Scanning of audio files in external
device
2
This function play backs the first ten seconds
of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the func-
tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu
Scan.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth
*
06
266
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Version information Bluetooth
The car's current Bluetooth
version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu
Bluetooth software version in car.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
General
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth
can
be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment
system
1
. The infotainment system then works
handsfree, with the option to control a range of
the mobile phone's functions remotely. The
microphone used is located by the driver's sun
visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by
its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is
connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Menus
The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen-
tre console and the steering wheel keypad*.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Overview
System overview
Mobile phone.
Microphone.
Steering wheel keypad.
Centre console control panel.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
Number and letter buttons
TEL button activates/searches last con-
nected phone. If a phone is already con-
nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut
menu is shown with commonly used menu
options for the phone.
Accept incoming calls, confirm your selec-
tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing
OK/MENU.
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls; also used for
1
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
navigation among the options on the TV
screen.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes
input characters, leads up in the menu sys-
tem and cancels the current function.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
Remember
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last
connected phone. If a phone is already con-
nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu
is shown with commonly used menu options
for the phone. The
symbol indicates that
a phone is connected.
Connect an external Bluetooth
device
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per
device. After registration the device no longer
needs to be activated as visible/searchable.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth
devices
connected simultaneously. One phone and
one media device, which it is possible to switch
between, see page 269 or see page 265. It is
also possible to use the phone while streaming
audio files from a connected device.
Connecting an external device takes place in
different ways depending on whether or not the
device has been connected previously. The
connection options below presume that this is
the first time the device is being connected and
that no other device is connected.
There are two possible ways of connecting
devices, either search for the external device
from the car, or search for the car from the
external device. If one option does not work
then try with the other.
Example of normal view for phone.
If you are not already in the normal view, press
TEL in the centre console.
Alternative 1 - search for the external device
via the car's menu system
1. Make the external device searchable/visi-
ble via Bluetooth
, see the external devi-
ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.
2.
Press OK/MENU and follow the instruc-
tions on the TV screen.
> The external device is now connected to
the car and can be controlled from the
car.
If connection failed, press EXIT twice and con-
nect the device as described under Alternative
2.
Alternative 2 - Search for the car with the
Bluetooth
function of the external device.
1. Make the car searchable/visible via
Bluetooth
. Turn TUNE to Phone
settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select
Discoverable and confirm with OK/
MENU.
2.
Select
My Volvo Car on the screen of the
external device and follow the instructions.
3. Enter a PIN code in the external device and
then select to connect.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
4.
Press OK/MENU and enter the same PIN
code via the car keypad in the centre con-
sole.
Once the external device is connected, its
Bluetooth
name appears on the car's TV
screen and the unit can be controlled from the
car.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. If the last connected
mobile phone is not available then the system
will try to connect a mobile phone that was
paired earlier. When the audio system
searches for the last phone connected its name
is shown in the TV screen.
Manual connection
If you want to change the connected mobile
phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Change phone.
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices
in the car. However, the device must first have
been registered to the car, see Connect an
external Bluetooth® device. To change to
another device:
1. Check that the external device is searcha-
ble/visible via Bluetooth
, see the manual
for the external device.
2.
Press TEL and then select
Change
phone
.
> The car searches for previously con-
nected devices. The external devices
detected are specified with their respec-
tive Bluetooth
name in the TV screen.
3. Select the device to be connected by turn-
ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
> Connection of the external device takes
place.
To call
1.
Make sure that the
symbol appears
at the top of the TV screen and that the
handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed
dial number, see page 274. Or in normal
view turn TUNE to the right to access the
phone book, and to the left for the call reg-
ister for all calls. For information on the
phone book, see page 271.
3.
Press OK/MENU.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. The connection to the mobile phone can
be manually broken in phone mode under
Phone menu
Disconnect phone. For more
information on connection, see page 268.
The handsfree function is deactivated when
the engine is switched off and the door is
opened
2
.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued by
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been
manually disconnected, some mobile
phones may automatically couple up to the
last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a
new call begins.
Remove the device
A connected mobile phone can be deregis-
tered and removed. This is performed in phone
mode under Phone menu
Remove
Bluetooth device.
2
Only Keyless Drive.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
–
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
if the audio system is in e.g.
RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
– Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu
Call options Auto
answer.
In call menu
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
•
Mute - audio system microphone is
muted.
•
Mobile phone - the call is transferred from
handsfree to the mobile phone. For some
mobile phones the connection is interrup-
ted. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
•
Dial number - option to call a third party
using the number keys (current call set in
standby).
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. In normal view,
turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register
for
All calls .
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call
lists under Phone menu
All calls:
•
All calls
•
Missed calls
•
Answered calls
•
Dialled calls
•
Call duration
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled numbers in reverse order.
Voice mailbox
In normal view a speed dial number for the
voice mailbox can be programmed in and then
accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
mode under
Phone menu
Call options
Voicemail number Change number. If
there is no number stored then this menu can
be reached with one long press on 1.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming
call then it can be muted automatically. Acti-
vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone
menu
Phone settings Sounds and
volume
Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
settings
Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/
MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT
to save.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected in phone mode under
Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds
and volume
Ring signals Ring signal 1
etc.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
NOTE
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
the phone connected will not be switched
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
handsfree system is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal
3
, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.
Phone book
There are two phone books. These are merged
into one in the car and are displayed as a single
phone book in the car.
•
The car downloads the mobile phone's
phone book and only displays this phone
book when the mobile phone from which
this phone book was downloaded is con-
nected.
•
The car also has a built-in phone book. This
contains all the contacts stored in the car
irrespective of which phone was con-
nected when saving them. These contacts
are visible for all users, regardless of the
mobile phone that is connected to the car.
If a contact is saved in the car then the
symbol
is shown in front of the con-
tact in the phone book.
NOTE
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's telephone
book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the
phone. From the car, this will now look like
you have double records, with different
icons. Note also that when a shortcut num-
ber is saved or a change to a contact is
made, this will result in a new record in the
car's phone book.
All use of the phone book requires that the
symbol appears at the top of the TV
screen and that the handsfree function is in
phone mode.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each paired mobile phone. The
phone book can be copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
– Activate/deactivate the function in phone
mode under Phone menu
Phone
settings
Download phone book.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the TV
screen.
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain
a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select and
press OK/MENU to call.
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the sym-
bol ! appears to the right of the contact then
there are several phone numbers stored for the
contact. Press OK/MENU to show the num-
bers. Change and dial a number other than that
selected by default by turning TUNE. Press
OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the cen-
tre console's keypad to key in the start of the
contact's name (see "Character table keypad
in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed from
normal view by pressing and holding the button
on the centre console's keypad with the letter
that the contact searched for starts with. For
example, a long press on the button for 6 gives
instant access to that part of the list where the
contacts with the letter
M are located.
3
Not supported by all mobile phones.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
272
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Character table keypad in centre
console
Key Function
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2
D E F È É 3
G H I Ì 4
J K L 5
M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6
P Q R S ß 7
T U V Ü Ù 8
W X Y Z 9
Shift between upper and lower
case letter.
Key Function
+ 0 p w
# *
Searching for contacts
Search contacts using the text wheel.
Character list
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Phone book
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
mode to Phone menu
Phone book
Search.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
1.
Turn
4
TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
result of the search is shown in the phone
book (3).
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to go to the phone
book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see
explanation in the table below) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
4
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
press OK/MENU to see the
saved numbers and other infor-
mation.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
By pressing a number key in the centre console
when the text wheel is shown (see illustration
above), a new character list (1) appears in the
TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the
number key to the desired letter and then
release. Continue with the next letter and so
on. When a button is depressed the entry is
confirmed when another button is depressed.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
New contact
Entering letters for New contact.
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Input field
New contacts can be added in phone mode
under Phone menu
Phone book New
contact.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
1.
When the
Name row is selected, press
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus-
tration above).
2.
Turn
4
TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
name entered is shown in the input field (2)
in the TV screen.
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explana-
tion in the table below) in the list (1) and
then press OK/MENU.
When the name has been fully entered, select
OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press
OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone
number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been entered,
press OK/MENU and select a telephone num-
ber type (
Mobile phone, Home, Work or
General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
When all details have been filled in, select
Save
contact
in the menu to save the contact.
4
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth
handsfree*
06
274
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
OK Save and go back to Add con-
tact
with OK/MENU.
Change between uppercase and
lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU, the cursor
moves to the input field (2) at the
top of the TV screen. The cursor
can now be moved, with TUNE,
to the appropriate place to e.g.
insert new letters or delete with
EXIT. To be able to insert new
letters first go back to the input
mode, by pressing OK/MENU.
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
under Phone menu
Phone book Speed
dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per-
formed in phone mode using the number keys
on the keypad in the centre console, by press-
ing a number key and then pressing OK/
MENU. If there is no contact stored on the
speed dial number then an option is shown to
save a contact to the selected speed dial num-
ber.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
phone book from other mobile phones (other
than the one currently connected to the car). In
order to allow this the car is set to visible mode
for Bluetooth
. The function is activated in
phone mode under Phone menu
Phone
book
Receive vCard.
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and the
connected mobile phone's phone book can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Memory status.
Delete phone book
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
carried out in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Clear phone book.
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only dele-
tes contacts in the car's telephone book.
Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book
are not deleted.
Version information Bluetooth
The car's current Bluetooth
version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
General
The infotainment system's voice recognition
1
allows the driver to voice-activate certain func-
tions in a Bluetooth
-connected mobile phone
or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System).
NOTE
•
The information in this section
describes the use of voice commands
to control a mobile phone connected
using Bluetooth
. For detailed infor-
mation on using a mobile phone con-
nected using Bluetooth
with the car's
Infotainment system see page 267.
•
The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road
and Traffic Information System) has a
separate user manual which contains
more information on voice control and
voice commands to control that sys-
tem.
Voice commands offer convenience and help
the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibil-
ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
The voice recognition system allows the driver
to voice-activate certain functions of a
Bluetooth
-connected mobile phone and in
Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System), while the driver
can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
same time. The input data are in dialogue form
with spoken commands from the user and ver-
bal replies from the system. The voice recog-
nition system uses the same microphone as
the Bluetooth
handsfree system (see illustra-
tion on page 267) and the voice recognition
system's replies come via the car's speakers.
Language
Language list.
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
guages. Languages available for voice recog-
nition are marked with an icon in the language
list -
. Changing the language is performed
in the menu system MY CAR, see page 205.
1
Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
276
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remember
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
Before voice commands to a mobile phone can
be used the mobile phone must be paired and
connected via Bluetooth
handsfree. If a tele-
phone command is given and no mobile phone
is paired, then the system will provide informa-
tion about this. For information on pairing and
connecting a mobile phone, see page 268.
•
Press the button for voice recognition (1) in
order to activate the system and initiate a
dialogue with voice commands. The sys-
tem will then display commonly used com-
mands in the TV screen in the centre con-
sole.
Keep the following things in mind when you use
the voice recognition system:
•
For a command - speak after the tone, with
normal voice at normal speed.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
•
The car's doors and windows must be
closed.
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
If the driver is unsure of which command to
use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system
then responds with a few different com-
mands which can be used in the current sit-
uation.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
•
saying "Cancel"
•
not speaking
•
a long press on the steering wheel but-
ton for Voice recognition
•
Press EXIT or another main source but-
ton (e.g. MEDIA).
Help functions for voice recognition
•
Instructions: A function that helps you get
familiar with the system and the procedure
for giving commands.
•
Voice training: A function that enables the
voice recognition system to learn to know
your voice and your accent. The function
provides an opportunity to voice train two
user profiles.
The help functions can be accessed by press-
ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in
the centre console and then turning TUNE to
the desired menu option.
Instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
This instruction and voice training can only
be started when the car is parked.
•
Press the button for Voice recognition and
say "Voice instructions".
•
Activate the instructions in the menu sys-
tem MY CAR under Settings
Voice
settings
Voice tutorial. For a descrip-
tion of the menu system, see page 203.
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
which take around 5 minutes in total to com-
plete. The system starts with the first lesson.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press
the button for voice recognition and say
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by say-
ing "Previous".
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
on the button for voice recognition.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
you to say. Voice training can be started in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose
between
User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see page 203.
After voice training has been completed,
remember to set your user profile under
Voice
user setting
.
Additional settings in MY CAR
•
User setting - Two user profiles can be
set, the function is activated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings
Voice
settings
Voice user setting. Choose
between
User 1 or User 2. For a descrip-
tion of the menu system, see page 203.
•
Voice volume - Can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice output volume.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203.
Using voice commands
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice
commands by pressing the button for voice
recognition (see illustration on page 276).
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
used commands will be shown in the TV
screen. Greyed-out text or text within brackets
is not included in the spoken command.
When the driver becomes accustomed to the
system, he/she can speed up the command
dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys-
tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice
recognition.
Commands can be given in several ways
The command "Phone call contact" can be
pronounced as e.g.:
•
"Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait
for the system's reply, and then continue
by saying "Call contact."
or
•
"Phone call contact" - Say the whole com-
mand in one sequence.
Quick commands
Quick commands for the phone can be found
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice command list
Phone commands and General commands.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 203.
Dial a number
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced
individually, in groups of several numbers at a
time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers
greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the
system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not pos-
sible.
The following is an example of a dialogue with
voice commands. The system's reply will vary
depending on the situation.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call number
or
Phone call number
System reply
Number?
User action
Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number.
If you say several numbers and pause, the sys-
tem will repeat them, and then say "Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".
•
You can also change the number by saying
the commands "Correct" (which deletes
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
278
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
phone number).
Dialling from the call register
The following dialogue allows you to make a
phone call from one of your mobile phone's call
registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Call a contact
The following dialogue allows you to call your
pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
•
If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the dis-
play in the numbered rows and the system
prompts you to select a row number.
•
If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the list
(and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in
the list).
Calling voice mailbox
The following dialogue allows you to call your
voice mailbox to check if you have received
any messages. The phone number for your
voice mailbox must be registered in the
Bluetooth
function, see page 270.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
or
Phone call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
General
NOTE
This system only supports TV transmissions
in countries which transmit signals in
mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T stand-
ard. The system does not support TV trans-
missions in mpeg-4 format or analogue
transmissions.
NOTE
The TV picture is only shown when the car
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disap-
pears,
No visual media available while
driving
appears on the display screen,
although the audio is heard during this time.
The picture reappears when the car has
stopped.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage
level can also vary depending on where in
the country you are located.
IMPORTANT
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see
page 246.
Overview
Centre console control panel.
Station presets, numeric input.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod
or TV) is activated. If a source is acti-
vated and you press MEDIA then a short-
cut menu is shown with commonly used
menu options.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn-
ing TUNE.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by
pressing
/ .
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 241. For a description of
the remote control, see page 282.
Watch TV
–
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until
TV is shown
in the display, press OK/MENU.
> A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is
shown.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
280
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels
in the area is shown. If any of these chan-
nels is already saved as a preset then its
preset number is shown to the right of the
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
•
By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
•
Via a short press on the / buttons
the next available channel in the area is
shown.
NOTE
If the car has been moved within the coun-
try, for example, from one city to another, it
is not certain that the presets are available
at the new location as the frequency range
may have changed. In which case, carry out
a new search and save a new preset list, see
the function "Save the available TV channels
as presets", page 280.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if the car
was driven from Germany to France. A new
selection of country and a new search may
then need to be carried out.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
1.
Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2.
Turn TUNE to
TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3.
Turn TUNE to
Select country and press
OK/MENU.
> If one or more countries have previously
been selected then they are shown in a
list.
4.
Turn TUNE to either
Other countries or
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is shown.
5.
Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a pre-
set is shown. When the scan is com-
plete a message is shown and the pic-
ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-
sets) has now been created and is avail-
able. To change channel, see
page 279.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled
with EXIT.
Channel management
The preset list can be edited. You can change
the order of the channels that are shown in the
preset list. A TV channel can have more than
one place in the preset list. The TV channel
positions can also vary in the preset list.
To change the order in the preset list, go in TV
mode to TV menu
Reorganise presets.
1.
Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> The selected channel is highlighted.
2.
Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> The channels change places with each
other.
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the
other channels available in the area. It is pos-
sible to move a channel up to a place in the
preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If the car has been moved within the country,
for example, from one city to another, it is not
certain that the presets are available at the new
location as the frequency range may have
changed. In which case, carry out another scan
and save a new preset list.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
1.
Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2.
Turn TUNE to
TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3.
Turn TUNE to
Autostore and press OK/
MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a pre-
set is shown. When the scan is com-
plete a message is shown and the pic-
ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-
sets) has now been created and is avail-
able. To change channel, see
page 279.
Scanning the TV channels
This function automatically scans through the
frequency range for all channels available in the
area where you are. When a channel is found,
it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before
scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with
EXIT, then the channel that you just watched
continues to be shown. Scanning does not
affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu
Scan.
Teletext
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
steps:
1.
Press the
button on the remote con-
trol.
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
number keys (0-9) to select page.
> The page is shown automatically.
Enter new page number, or press the remote
control buttons
/ to go to the next page.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
the
button on the remote control.
It is also possible to control the teletext with the
coloured buttons on the remote control.
Information about the current
programme
Press the INFO button in order to display the
information about the current programme, the
next programme and its start time. If the
INFO button is pressed once more then addi-
tional information on the current programme
can sometimes be displayed, such as start and
end times and a brief description of the current
programme. For more information on the
INFO button, see page 241.
To return to the TV picture, wait several sec-
onds or press EXIT.
Picture settings
The settings for brightness and contrast can be
adjusted. For more information, see page 260.
The reception is lost
If the reception for the TV channel that is being
shown disappears then the picture will freeze.
Shortly after this a message appears informing
that the reception has been lost for the current
TV channel, and a new search for the channel
continues. When the reception returns the dis-
play of the TV channel starts immediately. It is
possible to change channel at any time when
the message is shown.
If the message
Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance with
"Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 280.
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
06
282
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con-
sole.
The remote control can be used for all func-
tions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as
the buttons in the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, first press the
remote control's button
to position F.
Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver,
which is located to the right of the INFO button
(see page 241) in the centre console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other com-
partments. Otherwise they may injure peo-
ple in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
NOTE
Do not expose the remote control to direct
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - oth-
erwise problems may arise with the batter-
ies.
Functions
Key Function
F = Front TV screen
Change to navigation*
Change to radio source (AM,
FM1 etc.)
Change to media source (Disc,
TV* etc.)
Change to Bluetooth
hands-
free*
Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
song.
Play/pause
Stop
Scroll/fast forward, change
track/song
Menu
To previous, cancels function,
deletes input characters
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
Key Function
Navigate up/down
Navigate right/left
Confirm selection or go to the
menu system for the selected
source
Volume, decrease
Volume, increase
0-9 Preset channels, number and let-
ter input
Shortcuts for favourite setting
Information about the current
programme, song, etc. Also used
when there is more information
available than can be shown in
the TV screen
Selection of language for sound-
track
Key Function
Subtitles, selection of language
for text
Teletext*, On/Off
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
is used.
The remote control is powered by four batter-
ies of the AA/LR6 type.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
and slide the battery cover in the direction
of the infrared lens.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
3. Refit the cover.
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batter-
ies in an environmentally safe manner.
284
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 286
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 289
Fuel....................................................................................................... 291
Loading................................................................................................. 294
Cargo area............................................................................................ 297
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 299
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 305
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
286
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
•
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the fuel con-
sumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
Cars with manual transmission are started
in 2nd gear under normal conditions on flat
ground.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 11 and 376.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
•
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the water
to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driv-
ing with a trailer, see page 300.
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high the instrument panel's
warning symbol is illuminated and there is
a text message displayed there
High
engine temp Stop safely
- stop the car in
a safe way and allow the engine to run at
idling speed for several minutes to cool
down.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
287
•
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine
or Coolant level low, Stop
engine
is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
the instrument panel's warning symbol and
there is a text message displayed there
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely - follow
the recommendation given and lower the
speed and stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool
down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
position II when the engine is switched off.
Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
•
ventilation fan
•
headlamps
•
windscreen wiper
•
audio system (high volume).
If the battery voltage is low the information dis-
play shows the text
Low battery Power save
mode
. The energy-saving function then shuts
down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
– In which case, charge the battery by star-
ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
•
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
•
The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum
antifreeze protection, different types of gly-
col must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 372.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
288
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather pla-
ces great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
•
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
07
289
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly pressing
in the rear part of the hatch.
Take out the flap.
Close the flap after fuelling.
For locking/unlocking of the fuel filler flap see
page 57. The fuel filler flap locking logic also
follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless-
drive and the central locking system. Fuel filler
flap locking always occurs after a 10-minute
delay.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when it cannot be opened from outside.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Carefully pull the line back in a straight line.
The flap can now be opened from outside.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Filling up with fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
•
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. Take care to insert the nozzle
properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe
consists of two opening covers. The nozzle
must be pushed past both covers before
refuelling is started.
•
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
07
290
NOTE
Avoid spillage by waiting approx.
5-8 seconds after refuelling before carefully
removing the nozzle.
Filling with a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Take care to insert the funnel properly into the
filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two open-
ing covers. The funnel must be pushed past
both covers before filling is started.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
291
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and
diesel are highly toxic and could cause per-
manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek
medical attention immediately if fuel has
been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-
bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should
91 RON be used.
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
•
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
292
Diesel
Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-
ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel
should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand-
ards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contami-
nants in the fuel, such as excessively high vol-
umes of sulphur particles for example.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
Special additives
•
Marine diesel fuel
•
Heating oil
•
FAME
1
(Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-
vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position
(see page 79).
2.
Press the START button without depress-
ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
293
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col-
lected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Filter regeneration takes place automatically
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take
a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con-
sumption may increase slightly during regen-
eration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
Soot filter full See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx-
imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles,
it may be difficult to start the engine and the
filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk
that the filter will need to be replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. See information on weights
page 369 and table page 376.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
294
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-
mation on weights, see page 369.
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote con-
trol key, see page 56.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning of
the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any
of the rear seat's backrests is folded down,see
page 25.
•
Centre the load.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the
load. During heavy braking the load may
otherwise shift, causing personal injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into
a drive position - and the car could then
move off.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 81.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information about the maximum allowable
load on the roof, including load carriers and
any space box, see page 369.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
295
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 84.
Load retaining eyelets
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Bag holder
The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and
prevent them from overturning and spreading
their contents around the cargo area. The
holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.
Bag holder
Folding bag holder*
Folding bag holder
A folding bag holder in the floor can be opened
up in three positions. It can be set to two
adjustment positions and one service position,
as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There
are also two floor combination variants, one
with adjustment positions in a tub under the
floor and one with adjustment positions in plas-
tic rails. The raising below shows the adjust-
ment position in a tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg, and
max. 10 kg on the outer holder.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
296
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold
up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate
position and place it in the adjustment
groove.
3. In service position, the floor is moved all
the way forwards towards the rear seat
back and placed in the plastic support in
the centre.
12 V socket*
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 320.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
297
Cargo net*
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.
A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of heavy braking. For safety reasons, the
cargo net must always be correctly fastened
and secured. The mesh is made of a strong
nylon fabric and secured behind the front seat
backrests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also have a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
Attaching
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via
one of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper
securing points of the safety net are fitted
correctly and that the puller-straps are
secured properly. Damaged nets must not
be used.
1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that
the split upper rod is locked in the
extended position.
2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof
mounting with the anchoring strap locks
turned towards you.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof
mounting on the opposite side - the tele-
scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facil-
itate alignment. Take care to press forward
the rod's retaining hooks for each respec-
tive roof mounting's front end position.
4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps into
the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails -
it is easier if the backrests are straightened
and the seats are moved forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the
net when the seat/backrest is moved back
again - only adjust until the seat/backrest
makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard
into the safety net then the net and/or its
roof mounts may be damaged.
5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring
straps.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
07
298
Removal and storage
The cargo net can be easily removed and folded
up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing
in the button on the anchoring strap's lock
and feeding out part of the strap.
Press in the catch and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by
pulling back on the rod in the roof mount-
ings' rear end position. Press the rod in any
direction so that the hook engages in the
rod, which at the same time releases the
hook on the other side.
Finally, remove the remaining roof mount-
ing hook from the roof mounting.
4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it together
and roll up the net.
Insert the net in the storage bag.
The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the
luggage compartment.
Hat shelf
The hat shelf can be removed to provide addi-
tional cargo space.
Hat shelf removal
Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both
sides.
Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and
remove it.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
299
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 369.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equip-
ment for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 318.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica-
tors are broken, then the combined instrument
panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
faster than normal and the display shows the
text
Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the
Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer
text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 370.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo. The
maximum permitted speed for a car with a
trailer attached is 100 km/h. National vehicle
regulations may further restrict the trailer
weight and speed. Towbars can be certified
for higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
300
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
•
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning sym-
bol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - follow the
recommendation given.
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
119.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a removable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose sec-
tion must be followed carefully, see page 302.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
•
Follow the installation instructions care-
fully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
WARNING
The moving parts of the detachable towbar
must not be lubricated/oiled. This may
reduce safety.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
301
Storing the detachable towbar
The storage location for the removable towbar.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar after
use and store it in the designated location in
the car.
Specifications
G021485
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 887
B 79
C 881
D 441
E 109
F 306
G Side member
H Ball centre
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
302
Fitting of removable towbar
Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
G021487
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
G021489
Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G021490
The indicator window must show green.
G000000
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
303
G021494
Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch,
the remainder of the towbar must be clean
and dry.
G021495
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
Removal of removable towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is
stored in the car, see page 301.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
304
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves
to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 138.
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking
occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is
a risk of it occurring at lower speeds
(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
TSA system continually monitors car move-
ments, particularly lateral movements. If snak-
ing is detected, the front wheels are individually
braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer
combination. This is often enough to help the
driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is once again stable, the TSA sys-
tem stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car.
Miscellaneous
The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 65 to 160 km/h.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects
Sport mode, see page 138.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because in such a situation the TSA
system cannot determine whether it is the
trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA is working.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
305
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before towing begins.
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is
activated, see page 79 for more informa-
tion on key positions.
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal -
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is
being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering
is considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
– Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow cars with automatic trans-
mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
or for distances in excess of 80 km. Fol-
low the speeds that are permitted in
accordance with local traffic regula-
tions.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the
route must be as short as possible and then
with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
ignation on the transmission's label under the
bonnet - see page 366. The designa-
tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans-
mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
306
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling for-
ward.
•
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recom-
mended.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see page 114.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
NOTE
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in
the foam block:
•
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out
the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access
the towing eye.
•
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the towing eye. The wheel
wrench is located underneath the jack.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
•
The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the mark-
ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-
site side/corner at the same time using
a screwdriver - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
307
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
The towing eye is unscrewed after use.
Place the towing eye back in its position.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing
eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.
Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
detachable towbar's towball in the car.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor-
ted with the wheels rolling forward.
308
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General ................................................................................................. 310
Changing wheels .................................................................................. 314
Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 318
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 319
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...................................................... 320
WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
310
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-
sure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Direction of rotation
G021778
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 378.
Tyre care
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam-
ples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol-
oration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
tured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
311
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 318. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-
sible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G021829
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
Low wheel bolt
High wheel bolt
Locking wheel bolts
Tightening torque:
•
Type 1 wheel bolt (steel rim): 110 Nm
•
Type 2 wheel bolt (aluminium rim): 130
Nm
•
Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt (steel/alu-
minium rim): 110 Nm
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
312
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock-
able wheel bolts.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all
four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-
tres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels and
tyres are approved. For the permissible com-
binations, see page 378
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-
sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
16 Rim diameter in
inches
50 Off-set in mm (dis-
tance from wheel
centre to wheel con-
tact surface against
the hub)
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
50 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
93 Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
270 km/h).
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
313
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load,
a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini-
mum permitted index is specified in the table,
see page 378.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed
rating is specified in the table, see page 378.
The only exception to these conditions is win-
ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without), where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not
be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified
in the table.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
314
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Spare wheel*
1
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-
sible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 378.
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare"
wheel.
Taking out the spare wheel
The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel
wrench* are stored under the floor in the lug-
gage compartment.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart-
ment floor (or on models with a jointed lug-
gage compartment floor, take hold of the
luggage compartment floor handle, lift and
move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment (optional
extra) - models with a jointed luggage com-
partment floor only.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join-
ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the
foam block containing the jack and tools.
5. Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel,
then lift. Push the spare wheel forwards
slightly and lift it out of the storage com-
partment.
6. Remove the wheel wrench, the jack and
the towing eye from the foam block.
NOTE
The jack must be lifted out in order to
access the towing eye.
Jack*
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread
must always be well greased.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 319 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-
face.
1
If the car is equipped with a temporary tyre repair kit, see page 320 for information.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
315
1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
2. Take out the spare wheel and tools (see the
description on page 314). There is also a
package containing gloves and a wheel
bag for the punctured wheel.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and
pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alter-
natively, the wheel covers can be pulled
away by hand.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as
shown in the following illustration.
The wheel wrench and towing eye
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
316
IMPORTANT
The ground under the jack must be firm,
smooth and level.
8. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the
bodywork ends up in the notch in the head
of the jack.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car such that passengers have the
car, or ideally a crash barrier, between
themselves and the roadway.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured
tyre, switching between summer tyres and
winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to
the specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack
is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly (see page 311 for tightening
torques). Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
5.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
317
Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be
positioned over the valve on the wheel rim
during fitting.
Replacing the spare wheel* and jack* in
the luggage compartment
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places in the foam block after use.
1. Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel
wrench and place the towing eye in the
compartment in the bottom of the foam
block.
2. Wind together the jack to the halfway point
so that it fits into the foam block. Place the
end of the handle in the compartment in the
foam block.
3. Put back any tools that have been used in
the relevant compartments in the foam
block.
4. If the spare wheel has been used, put the
foam block back in the storage area and
tighten the attaching screw in the floor of
the storage compartment. The punctured
wheel can be placed in the plastic bag con-
tained in the package with the gloves.
If the spare wheel has not been used, place
the foam block in the spare wheel and
place the spare wheel back in the storage
compartment. Tighten the attaching screw
to the floor of the storage compartment.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
08
318
Tyre pressure
G021830
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This is
also specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 378.
•
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
•
ECO pressure
1
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds below 160 km/h, the ECO pressure
is recommended (applies for both full load and
light load - see page 378) in order to obtain
optimum fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature. After several
few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up
and the pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
1
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
319
Warning triangle
Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of
the luggage compartment floor forwards in
models with a jointed floor and then lift the
lower floor) and remove the warning trian-
gle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-
able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
A case containing first aid equipment is located
on the left side of the cargo area.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
320
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Version 1.
Version 2.
Emergency puncture repair (TMK: Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The
kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira-
tion date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
Connect the compressor to one of the car’s 12
V sockets; see pages 236 and 296. Choose the
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Positioning of the emergency puncture
repair kit and warning triangle
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location. The warning tri-
angle and emergency puncture repair kit are
located under the floor in the luggage com-
partment.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart-
ment floor (or on models with a jointed lug-
gage compartment floor, take hold of the
luggage compartment floor handle, lift and
move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment (optional
extra) - models with a jointed luggage com-
partment floor only.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join-
ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Unhook the elastic part of the belt over the
TMK compressor unit on the left side.
5. Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up.
6. To access the bottle of sealant, it must be
pushed to the left until it can be lifted out
of the foam block.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
321
NOTE
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in
the foam block:
•
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out
the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access
the towing eye.
•
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for
the emergency puncture repair kit (point
5) to access the towing eye. The wheel
wrench is located underneath the jack.
After use, hook the belt back onto the left side.
Version 1: The belt must be pulled behind the
foam block (not above).
Version 2: The belt must be in the fork on the
rear part of the foam block.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G014338
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
322
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8.
Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres-
sure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure table, see page 378 (1
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
323
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the
dust cap.
4. Fold the hose into the box and leave the
bottle where it is. Place TMK in the lug-
gage.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-
est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace-
ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 378. (Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
324
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
08 Wheels and tyres
08
325
326
Engine compartment............................................................................. 328
Lamps................................................................................................... 335
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 341
Battery................................................................................................... 344
Fuses..................................................................................................... 348
Car care................................................................................................ 357
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
328
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
•
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Opening and closing the bonnet
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the
left-hand side.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illus-
tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
329
Engine compartment, overview
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Filling washer fluid
Radiator
Engine oil dipstick
1
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
tem is highly dangerous. The remote control
key must always be in 0 position when work
is being done in the engine compartment,
see page 79.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the remote control key is in II position
or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 372.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-
tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
driver is informed via the warning symbol in the
centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-
play texts. Certain models have both variants.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
1
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
330
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
ance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 372.
For capacities, see page 373 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick
2
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
diately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
G021737
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5.
If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps
1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
2
Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
331
Engine with electronic oil level sensor
3
Filler pipe
You do not need to take action with respect to
the engine oil level before a message is shown
in the display, see the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display. The left display
shows the Digital combined instrument panel
while the right displays shows the Analog com-
bined instrument panel.
Message
Engine oil level
On certain cars, the oil level can be checked
using the electronic oil level gauge with the
thumbwheel when the engine is switched off,
see page 332.
Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre
, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
3
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
332
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Measuring the oil level*
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
1.
Activate key position II, see page 79.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position
Engine oil level
Wait...
.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. The rec-
ommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in
the display. The left display shows the Digital com-
bined instrument panel while the right displays
shows the Analog combined instrument panel.
Coolant
Checking the level and topping up
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 374.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
333
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
ommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-
peratures that are too high may occur
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks)
in the cylinder head.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 374. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
ommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Filling
Brake fluid reservoir location.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold zone in the engine compartment.
The round cover must be removed first before
the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
334
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluores-
cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an author-
ised workshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
335
General
All bulbs are specified, see page 340. The fol-
lowing list contains locations of bulbs and
other light sources that are specialised or
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
•
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
Side direction indicators, door mirrors
1
•
Approach lighting, door mirrors
•
Side position, position lamps rear
•
Brake light above the rear windscreen
•
Interior and luggage compartment lighting
•
Glovebox lighting
•
LED lights, general
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car-
ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
WARNING
The car’s electrical system must be in key
position 0 when replacing bulbs, see
page 79.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recom-
mend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Headlamps front
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
Take out the tool (Torx 30) found under the floor
hatch in the cargo area.
1.
Lift out the bonnet stop.
1
Certain models
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
336
2.
Undo the screw using the tool (Torx 30).
3.
Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.
Pull out the locking pin.
4.
Release the headlamp by alternately
tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so
as not to damage any parts.
5.
Press down the catch.
Unplug the connector.
Place the headlight on a soft surface so as
not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector.
6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
The headlight must be fitted and the contact
fitted correctly before switching on the lights or
switching key position.
Cover for main/dipped beam lamps
1.
Press the hooks together.
Angle out the cover.
2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
Dipped beam
2
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3.
Press the bulb holder upwards until it
releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
2
Cars with halogen headlights
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
337
Main beam
2
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Additional main beam*
3
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3.
Press the bulb holder upwards until it
releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Direction indicators/flashers, front
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2.
Undo the cover.
3.
Push in the catch.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
2
Cars with halogen headlights
3
Cars with xenon headlights
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
338
Position/parking lamps
4
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Side marker lamps
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2.
Undo the cover.
3.
Pull down the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Daytime running lights
5
1.
Undo the cover.
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
4
Not applicable to cars with xenon headlights as these are equipped with LED lamps.
5
Applicable only to daytime running lights with halogen lamps.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
339
Location of rear bulbs
Brake light (LED)
Position lamp
Brake light
Side marker lamps
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
Rear fog lamp
Lamp housing, rear
Direction indicators, brake lights and rear lights
are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on
the same side as the defective bulb.
2.
Press the catch sideways.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Rear fog lamp
Insert (approx. 20 mm) a blunt, knife-like
object, such as a table knife, at the triangle.
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
09
340
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Vanity mirror lighting
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp
lens.
3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb
straight out to the side. Do not squeeze too
hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb
glass could break.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting
[W]
A
Type
Dipped beam
B
55 H7 LL
Main beam
B
65 H9
Additional main
beam
C
55 H7 LL
Front direction
indicators
21 HY21W
Position lamp
B
5 W5W LL
Side marker lamps 5 WY5W LL
Daytime running
lights
B
19 PW19W
Side direction indi-
cators, door mir-
rors
D
5 WY5W LL
Direction indica-
tors, rear
21 PY21W LL
Brake light 21 P21W LL
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Lighting
[W]
A
Type
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
Vanity mirror light-
ing
1.2 T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
A
Watt
B
Cars with halogen headlights
C
Cars with xenon headlights
D
Certain models
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
341
Wiper blades
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
example) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the serv-
ice position, make sure that they are not fro-
zen down.
1. Place the remote control key in the ignition
lock
1
and briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical
system to key position I. (For detailed infor-
mation on key positions, see page 79.)
2.
Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical sys-
tem in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-
tem to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in the service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
NOTE
Once the wiper arms have been in service
position, the wipers must be activated and
deactivated before the service position can
be used again.
Replacing the wiper blades
1
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
342
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
G021763
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
WARNING
Since the car is equipped with airbag
Pedestrian Airbag, Volvo recommends that
genuine wiper arms are used and that you
only use genuine parts for them.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 357 and onwards.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
343
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of the
wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser-
voir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 374.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
344
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits star-
ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
IMPORTANT
A quick charger must never be used when
charging the battery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotain-
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/
or the message in the information display
about the main battery's state of charge
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
the connection of an external battery or bat-
tery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
345
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy-
cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally safe manner as it contains
lead.
Replacing the main battery
Volvo recommends that you allow an author-
ised workshop to replace the batteries - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information on the car's main battery
- see page 114
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
battery for starting and one standby battery
that helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe
function's starting sequence.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 123.
For more information on the car's main battery
- see page 114 and 379.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
346
Battery Start Support
Cold start
capacity
A
,
CCA (A)
760
B
800
C
120
B
180
C
Size
D
,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×190
B
315×175×190
C
150×90×106
B
150×90×130
C
Capacity
(Ah)
70
B
80
C
8
B
10
C
A
According to EN standard.
B
Manual gearbox.
C
Automatic gearbox.
D
Largest possible size.
IMPORTANT
When replacing batteries in cars with the
Start/Stop function, the AGM
1
type batter-
ies must be fitted.
NOTE
•
The higher the current take-off in the car
(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more
the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level
then the Start/Stop function is disen-
gaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
•
The engine starts automatically
2
without
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox).
•
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
Location of the batteries
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1.
Battery for starting
3
2. Support battery.
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in
the event of questions or problems - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
1
Absorbed Glass Mat
2
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
3
The battery for starting is described in detail on page 345.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
347
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporar-
ily cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electri-
cal functions and the engine is subsequently
started using an external battery or battery
charger, then the Start/Stop function will be
activated. It will then be possible for the
engine to be auto-stopped but in the event
of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may
fail to auto-start the engine due to inade-
quate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to
ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-
stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C
the battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a
charging time of 3-4 hours is recom-
mended. The recommendation is that the
battery is charged using an external battery
charger.
If this is not possible then the recommen-
dation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
348
General
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-
tect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glo-
vebox changes sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Below right front seat
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
349
Engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
•
Fuses 7-18 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop
1
.
•
Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
Function A
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 30
Headlamp washers* 20
Ventilation fan 40
- -
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30
Function A
Starter motor actuator solenoid
(not Start/Stop)
30
Electric windscreen, right side* 40
- -
Electric windscreen, left side* 40
Parking heater* 20
Windscreen wipers 20
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
350
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
Central electronic module, refer-
ence voltage, standby battery
(Start/Stop)
5
Horn 15
Brake light 5
- -
Headlamp control 5
Internal relay coils 5
12 V socket, tunnel console front 15
Transmission control module 15
Solenoid clutch A/C 15
12 V socket, tunnel console rear 15
Climate sensor*; air intake throt-
tle motors
10
Engine control module (5-cyl.) 5
Power seat, right* 20
Function A
Relay coil in cooling fan relay (4-
cyl., 5-cyl. diesel); Lambda-
sonds (4-cyl. petrol); Mass air
flow meter (diesel), Bypass valve,
EGR cooling (diesel); Regulator
valve, fuel flow (5-cyl. diesel);
Regulator valve, fuel pressure (5-
cyl. diesel)
10
Relay coil in cooling fan relay (5-
cyl. petrol); Lambda-sonds (5-
cyl. petrol)
20
Mass air flow meter (4-cyl. pet-
rol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol);
Injection valves (5-cyl. petrol);
Control motor, turbo (4-cyl. die-
sel); Regulator valve, fuel flow (4-
cyl. diesel); Solenoid, piston
cooling (5-cyl. diesel); Turbo reg-
ulator valve (5-cyl. diesel); Oil
level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Valves (petrol); Solenoids (petrol);
Lambda probe (diesel); Crank-
case ventilation heater (5-cyl.);
Mass air flow meter (5-cyl. petrol)
10
Function A
Ignition coils (petrol) 10
Diesel filter heater; Glow plug
control unit (5-cyl. diesel); Oil
pump, automatic gearbox (5-cyl.
diesel Start/Stop)
15
Engine control module (4-cyl.) 10
Engine control module (5-cyl.);
Throttle unit (5-cyl. petrol)
15
ABS 5
Engine control module; Trans-
mission control module; Airbags
10
Light height control* 10
Electric control servo 5
Central electronic module 15
- -
Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10
Collision warning system 5
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
Charging point, standby battery -
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
351
Function A
- -
- -
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
352
Under the glovebox
On the inside of the cover for the fusebox in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed when a protective
cover has been removed from the fusebox.
Cover removal
1. Take hold of the recess and pull until the
locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover
are released from the fusebox.
2. Remove the cover.
NOTE
A relatively large amount of tensile force is
required to release the locking lugs at the
top edge of the cover from the electrical
distribution unit.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
353
Cover refitting
1. Guide in the lower lugs.
2. Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs
engage.
NOTE
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are
seated properly in the grooves of the elec-
trical distribution unit.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function A
Fuel pump 20
- -
Rear window wiper 15
Reserve position, interior lighting 5
Interior lighting; Power seats 10
Blind, glass roof* 10
Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior
rearview mirror*; Moisture sen-
sor*
5
Collision warning system* 5
- -
Unlocking, tailgate
A
10
- -
Reserve position 3, constant
voltage
5
Steering lock 15
Combined instrument panel 5
Function A
Central locking system, fuel filler
flap
B
10
Climate panel 10
Steering wheel module 7.5
Siren alarm*; Data link connector
OBDII
5
Main beam 15
- -
Reversing lamp 10
Windscreen wipers
C
; Rear wind-
screen wiper
C
20
Immobiliser 5
Reserve position 1, constant
voltage
15
Reserve position 2, constant
voltage
20
Movement sensor alarm*;
Remote receiver
5
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
354
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
Windscreen wipers
D
; Rear wind-
screen wiper
D
20
Central locking system, fuel filler
flap
E
10
Unlocking, tailgate
F
10
PTC element, air preheater*;
Button, rear seat heating*
7.5
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag 10
Reserve position 4, constant
voltage
7.5
- -
- -
A
See also fuse 84.
B
See also fuse 83.
C
See also fuse 82.
D
See also fuse 77.
E
See also fuse 70.
F
See also fuse 65.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
355
Below right front seat
On the inside of the cover for the fusebox in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
•
Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop
2
.
•
Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
Function A
- -
Keyless* 10
Door handle (Keyless*) 5
Control panel, left front door 25
Function A
Control panel, right front door 25
Control panel, left rear door 25
Control panel, right rear door 25
- -
Power seat left* 20
- -
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
356
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
- -
Audio control unit (amplifier)* 5
- -
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5
Audio; Infotainment control unit 15
Digital radio*; TV* 10
12 V socket, cargo area 15
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Trailer socket 2* 20
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16:
Infotainment
40
- -
Function A
Trailer socket 1* 40
Rear window defroster 30
- -
BLIS* 5
Parking assistance* 5
Parking camera* 5
- -
- -
Seat heating (driver's side) 15
Seat heating (passenger side) 15
- -
- -
- -
Seat heating, rear right* 15
Seat heating, rear left* 15
AWD control module* 15
Function A
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
357
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings con-
tain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
•
Hose down the underbody.
•
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case,
the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you
reduce the risk of water drying stains which
may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
– Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 341.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the
paint is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
358
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paint-
work. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo war-
ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers is recommended in
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
359
order to maintain the water-repellent proper-
ties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rust-
proofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by your Volvo dealer!
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appear-
ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural charac-
teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the clean-
ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
360
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-
able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
•
Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
•
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-
tened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plas-
tic.
•
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
``
361
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches and marks on the edges
of wings, doors and bumpers.
Materials
•
primer
1
- a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-
coated bumpers
•
basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
2
•
masking tape
•
fine sand paper
1
.
Colour code
Car colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 366.
Repair minor paintwork damage such as
stone chips and scratches
G021832
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of
a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better results
- spray into the lid of the spray can and
brush on thinly.
1
If required.
2
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
362
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with basecoat and
clearcoat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
09 Maintenance and service
09
363
364
Type designations................................................................................. 366
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 368
Engine specifications............................................................................ 371
Engine oil............................................................................................... 372
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 374
Fuel....................................................................................................... 376
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 378
Electrical system................................................................................... 379
Type approval....................................................................................... 380
Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 392
SPECIFICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
10
366
Label location
10 Specifications
Type designations
10
367
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
location in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car is available on
the respective decals for your car.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
368
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2647
B Length 4369
C Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
1508
D Load length, floor 684
E Height 1445
F Load height 532
Dimensions mm
G Front track
1546
A
1551
B
1559
C
H Rear track
1536
A
1541
B
1549
C
I Load width, floor 960
J Width 1802
Dimensions mm
K Width including door mirrors 2041
L Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1857
A
Offset 46 mm.
B
Offset 50 mm.
C
Offset 52.5 mm.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
369
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table page 370) influences the payload and is
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-
out extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor-
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carrier,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Luggage cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For information on decal location, see page 366.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
370
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T3 Manual, B6 1300 75
T4 Manual, B6 1300 75
D2 Manual, B6 1300 75
D3 Manual, M66 1500 75
D3 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
D4 Manual, M66 1500 75
D4 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Engine Gearbox Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T3 Manual, B6 650 50
T4 Manual, B6 650 50
D2 Manual, B6 650 50
D3 Manual, M66 700 50
D3 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50
D4 Manual, M66 700 50
D4 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
10
371
Engine specifications
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Com-
pression
ratio
T3 B4164T3 110/5700 150/5700 240/1600–4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1
T4 B4164T 132/5700 180/5700 240/1600–5000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1
D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D3 D5204T6 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81.0 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T4 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81.0 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 366.
10 Specifications
Engine oil
10
372
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
towing a caravan or trailer
•
in mountainous regions
•
at high speeds
•
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-
ter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
10 Specifications
Engine oil
10
373
Engine oil grade
Engine
Engine code
A
Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T3 B4164T3
Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A
options for service:
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 4.1
T4 B4164T approx. 4.1
D2 D4162T
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
approx. 3.8
D3 D5204T6
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T4 approx. 5.9
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 366.
For filling engine oil, see page 329.
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
10
374
Coolant
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water
1
, see the pack-
aging.
Engine
A
Volume
(litres)
T3 B4164T3
7.0
T4 B4164T
Engine
A
Volume
(litres)
D2 D4162T 10.0
D3 D5204T6
8.0
D4 D5204T4
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on
the engine, see page 366.
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
B6 1.6
BOT 350M3
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD 7.0 AW1
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
10
375
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear-
box oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, it may be neces-
sary under adverse driving conditions, see
page 372.
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 5.5 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
Cars without headlamp washing 3,2
Fuel T3, T4 approx. 62 Petrol: see page 291
D2 approx. 52 Diesel: see page 292
D3, D4 approx. 60
Compressor oil Air conditioning 0,11 PAG oil
Coolant Air conditioning 0,65 kg R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an author-
ised workshop.
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
376
CO
2
emissions and fuel consumption
T3 158 6.8 106 4.6 125 5.4
T4 164 7.0 109 4.7 129 5.5
D2
A
105 4.0 88 3.4 94 3.6
D2
B
110 4.2 93 3.6 99 3.8
D3 139 5.3 100 3.8 114 4.3
D3 179 6.9 112 4.3 136 5.2
D4 139 5.3 100 3.8 114 4.3
D4 179 6.9 112 4.3 136 5.2
A
94 g/km CO2 version, max tyre width 205.
B
99 g/km CO2 version.
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
377
Explanation
gram/km
litre/100 km
Urban driving
Extra-urban driving
Combined driving
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is
missing then it is included in the enclosed
supplement.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles
1
,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-
ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's val-
ues. Examples of this are:
•
The driver's driving style.
•
If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the mod-
el's basic version, then resistance increa-
ses.
•
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to
1
.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles
1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
•
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-
eration as well as braking too hard.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 378.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 11 and 286.
See page 291 for general information on fuel.
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008, 715/2007 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101.The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold
starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission
are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO
2
emissions
- the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
10
378
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
T3
T4
D2
195/65 R15
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
225/40 R18
0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 230 230 260 260 -
D3
D4
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 290 240 310 270 -
225/40 R18
0 - 160 240 240 260 260 260
160 + 290 240 310 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
10 Specifications
Electrical system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
379
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the bat-
tery).
Battery
Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
Petrol 12 520–800 100–160
Diesel 12 700–800 135–160
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12
760
A
135
A
Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
NOTE
•
The battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's
dimensions.
•
The battery's height is different depend-
ing on size.
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
For information on batteries in cars with
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 345.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
380
Remote control key system
Lock system, standard
Country
EU, China
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
Korea
Country
China
Hong Kong
Radar system
Country
Singapore
IDA: Infocomm Development
Authority of Singapore.
Brazil
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
``
381
Bluetooth
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth
device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
382
Country
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth
Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth
Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth
Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
``
383
Country
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth
Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth
Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth
Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ Bluetooth
Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ
ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth
Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth
Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth
Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth
Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Nether-
lands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth
Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth
Module jikkonforma mal-ĘtiĒijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oĘrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth
Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
384
Country
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth
Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth
Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth
Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth
Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth
Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth
Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och
övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth
Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth
Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
``
385
Country
China:
㄀कϝᴵǂ䖯ষ੠⫳ѻॖଚ೼݊ѻકⱘ䇈ᯢк៪Փ⫼᠟ݠЁˈᑨߞॄϟ䗄᳝݇ݙᆍ˖
ᷛᯢ䰘ӊЁ᠔㾘ᅮⱘᡔᴃᣛᷛ੠Փ⫼㣗ೈˈ䇈ᯢ᠔᳝᥻ࠊǃ䇗ᭈঞᓔ݇ㄝՓ⫼ᮍ⊩˗
ƵՓ⫼乥⥛˖*+]
Ƶㄝᬜܼ৥䕤ᇘࡳ⥛(,53˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨P:៪싨G%Pǂķ
Ƶ᳔໻ࡳ⥛䈅ᆚᑺ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨G%P0+](,53ķ
Ƶ䕑乥ᆍ䰤˖SSP
Ƶᴖᬷথᇘ䕤ᇘࡳ⥛ᇍᑨ䕑⊶f סֵ䘧ᏺᆑҹ໪˖
•
싨G%PN+]0+]
•
싨G%PN+]*+]
•
싨G%P0+]*+]
•
싨G%P0+]*+]
•
싨G%P0+]݊ᅗ *+]
ϡᕫ᪙㞾᳈ᬍথᇘ乥⥛ǃࡴ໻থᇘࡳ⥛ࣙᣀ乱໪ࡴ㺙ᇘ乥ࡳ⥛ᬒ໻఼ˈϡᕫ᪙㞾໪᥹໽㒓៪ᬍ⫼݊ᅗথᇘ໽㒓˗
Փ⫼ᯊϡᕫᇍ৘⾡ড়⊩ⱘ᮴㒓⬉䗮ֵϮࡵѻ⫳᳝ᆇᑆᡄ˗ϔᮺথ⦄᳝ᑆᡄ⦄䈵ᯊˈᑨゟेذℶՓ⫼ˈᑊ䞛প᥾ᮑ⍜䰸ᑆᡄৢᮍৃ㒻㓁
Փ⫼˗
Փ⫼ᖂࡳ⥛᮴㒓⬉䆒໛ˈᖙ乏ᖡফ৘⾡᮴㒓⬉Ϯࡵⱘᑆᡄ៪ᎹϮǃ⾥ᄺঞए⭫ᑨ⫼䆒໛ⱘ䕤ᇘᑆᡄ˗
ϡᕫ೼亲ᴎ੠ᴎഎ䰘䖥Փ⫼DŽ
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
386
Country
Taiwan:
܅㧤෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻䏺ऄรԼ㦕
รԼԲය
ᆖীڤᎁᢞٽ௑հ܅פ෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺ױΔֆ׹Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌشृ݁լ൓ᖐ۞!᧢ޓ᙮෷ΕףՕפ෷ࢨ᧢ޓ଺๻ૠհ௽ࢤ֗פ౨Ζ
รԼ؄ය
܅פ෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌشլ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰ڜ٤֗եឫٽऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼ڶեឫ෼ွழΔ!ᚨمܛೖشΔࠀޏ࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉᥛࠌشΖছႈ
ٽऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾऄ๵ࡳ!܂ᄐհྤᒵሽຏॾΖ܅פ෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊݴ࠹ٽऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭شሽं!ᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖ
CCAB10LP0230T7
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
``
387
Country
South
Korea:
⭧
⭧㟓#⭠‿
Volvo Car Korea
㐔㷡㣄G䂈☐aGuY\TphtYXWX}
㥐䖼G⮹aGiGhGuGy
⯜⒬G⮹aGphtYUX
㇤G⇔㬐aGtVYWXW
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
ါཨ#⭠‿
Volvo Car Korea
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜䂈⫠㙸
㉐㟬㐐G㟝㇤ẠG䚐⇜ Y ┍G^Y]TX^ZG⸰⸨⾀♝G[ 㽩
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜GḔᵑ㉰䉤GX\__TX^^^
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
⏷⧴⫛#ⱇ⪣⏷㢸
୔␭䚨Gⱨ㉔㉘⽸⏈G㤸䑀䝰㐔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㡰⳴⦐G㢬⮹㙼㤸ḰGḴ⥜═G㉐⽸㏘⏈G䚔G㍌G㛺㏩⏼␘
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
388
Country
Singa-
pore:
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
Jordan: The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number.
BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.
BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
``
389
Country
South
Africa:
Uruguay: This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A,
BVLV905A)]
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
390
Country
Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Nigeria:
Mexico:
Warning
"Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."
Bluetooth
module installation information
This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC-
TRONICS, INC. When this Bluetooth
Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since
"IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not
visible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-
IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections
15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.
COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
391
Country
Bot-
swana:
Croatia:
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
392
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 71 and 200 .
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the
same time an explanatory text is displayed in
the information display.
- Information symbol, illuminates in
combination with text in the information dis-
play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys-
tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor-
mation can also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Low oil pres-
sure
73
Parking brake
applied
73, 131
Parking brake
applied, alter-
native symbol
73
Airbags - SRS 17, 73
Seatbelt
reminder
14, 73
Alternator not
charging
73
Fault in the
brake system
73, 130
Warning,
safety mode
17, 28, 73, 119
Indicator symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Fault in the ABL
system*
72, 91
Emissions sys-
tem
72
Fault in the ABS
system
72, 130
Rear fog lamp on 72, 92
Stability system,
DSTC, Trailer
stability assist*
72, 139,
304
Stability system,
sport mode
72, 139
Engine pre-
heater (diesel)
72
Low level in fuel
tank
72, 224
Information,
read display text
72
Main beam on 72, 89
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
393
Symbol Meaning Page
Left-hand direc-
tion indicators
72
Right-hand
direction indica-
tors
72
DRIVe - Start/
Stop*, engine
auto-stopped
72, 123
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Main beam with
auto dimming -
AHB*
89
Camera sensor* 89
Adaptive cruise
control*
156
Adaptive cruise
control*
149, 150,
156
Symbol Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
150, 158
Adaptive cruise
control*
156
Adaptive cruise
control*
149
Adaptive cruise
control*
149
Cruise control* 145
Radar sensor* 156, 160,
173
Start/Stop*, Adap-
tive cruise control*
127, 156
Speed limiter 143
Symbol Meaning Page
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
165, 173,
178, 183
Auto Brake*, Dis-
tance Warning*
(Distance Alert),
City Safety
TM
, Colli-
sion warning sys-
tem*
160, 165,
173
G02510
2
Fuel-driven engine
block heater and
passenger com-
partment heater*
224
ABL system* 91
Fuel filler flap, right-
hand side
289
Low battery 224
Park Assist Pilot -
PAP*
190
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
394
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Meaning Page
Rain sensor* 99
Lane Keeping Aid* 182
Driver Alert System* 178
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Lane Keeping
Aid*
183
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*, Time for a
break
176, 178,
183
Gear indicator,
manual gearbox
115
Automatic gear
positions
116
Symbol Meaning Page
Registered speed
information*
141
Oil level measure-
ment
331
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 16
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
21
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
21
10 Specifications
10
395
11 Alphabetical Index
11
396
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 147
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 91
Active Park Assist.................................... 190
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 91
Adaptive cruise control............................ 147
fault tracing......................................... 155
radar sensor........................................ 154
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 227
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 95
halogen headlamp................................ 96
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 86
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 20
driver's and front passenger side......... 18
key switch off........................................ 20
AIRBAG ..................................................... 18
Airbag system ........................................... 17
Air conditioning........................................ 219
general................................................ 212
Air conditioning, AC................................. 219
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 334
Air distribution.................................. 213, 221
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 220
Air vents................................................... 214
Alarm.......................................................... 61
alarm indicator...................................... 61
alarm signals......................................... 62
arming................................................... 61
checking the alarm............................... 45
deactivate............................................. 61
deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 61
reduced alarm level.............................. 62
Alcolock................................................... 108
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 213
Approach light, duration...................... 44, 95
Audio
settings............................................... 245
surround..................................... 240, 245
Audio system........................................... 240
functions............................................. 245
overview.............................................. 241
Audio volume .......................................... 241
phone.................................................. 270
phone/media player............................ 270
ring signal, phone............................... 270
speed/noise compensation................ 245
Auto
climate control settings...................... 218
Automatic car washes............................. 357
Automatic gearbox.................................. 116
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 117
towing and recovery........................... 305
trailer................................................... 300
Automatic locking...................................... 55
Automatic relocking................................... 54
Auxiliary heater........................................ 227
AUX input......................................... 241, 261
B
Backrest..................................................... 81
front seat, lowering............................... 81
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 84
Bag holder .............................................. 295
Battery............................................. 344, 379
maintenance....................................... 344
remote control ................................... 283
remote control key/PCC....................... 48
start assistance................................... 114
symbols on the battery....................... 345
warning symbols................................. 345
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 195
BLIS......................................................... 194
11 Alphabetical Index
11
397
Bluetooth
handsfree ........................................... 267
media ................................................. 264
microphone off .................................. 270
streaming audio ................................. 264
transfer call to mobile ........................ 270
Bonnet, opening...................................... 328
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 333
Brake light.................................................. 92
Brakes...................................................... 129
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 129
brake light............................................. 92
brake system...................................... 129
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 129
emergency brake lights........................ 92
filling brake fluid.................................. 333
handbrake........................................... 131
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 130
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 335
C
Calls
incoming............................................. 269
operation............................................. 269
Camera sensor................................ 162, 171
Car care................................................... 357
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 359
Cargo area
Cargo net............................................ 297
lighting.................................................. 94
loading................................................ 294
mounting points.................................. 295
Parcel shelf......................................... 298
Car upholstery......................................... 359
Car wash.................................................. 357
Catalytic converter................................... 291
recovery.............................................. 306
CD ........................................................... 257
Centre console........................................ 203
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 332
Checking the engine oil level................... 329
Children..................................................... 31
child safety locks.................................. 35
child seats and side airbags................. 22
location in the car................................. 31
safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks...................................... 60
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 35
recommended...................................... 32
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 35
upper mounting points for child seats.. 38
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 235
City Safety™............................................ 161
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 357
car wash............................................. 357
rims..................................................... 358
seatbelts............................................. 360
upholstery........................................... 359
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 213
Climate control........................................ 212
general................................................ 212
sensors............................................... 212
Clock, setting............................................. 75
CO
2
emissions ........................................ 376
Collision..................................................... 28
11 Alphabetical Index
11
398
Collision warning............................. 167, 168
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 154, 161, 167
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 167
Colour code, paint................................... 361
Combined instrument panel.............. 69, 200
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 234
Compass................................................. 107
calibration........................................... 107
Condensation in headlamps.................... 357
controls
centre console ................................... 241
Controls
centre console.................................... 203
Controls, lights........................................... 87
Control symbols......................................... 71
Cooling system........................................ 286
Corner Traction Control .......................... 138
Crash, see Collision................................... 28
Cruise control.......................................... 145
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 213
D
DAB Radio............................................... 254
Daytime running lights............................... 88
Deadlock
deactivation.......................................... 58
temporary deactivation......................... 58
Deadlocks.................................................. 58
Defroster.................................................. 219
Diesel....................................................... 292
Diesel particle filter.................................. 293
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 331
Direction indicators.................................... 93
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 118
Display lighting.......................................... 87
Distance Warning.................................... 158
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 240
Door mirrors............................................. 104
Driver Alert Control.................................. 176
Driver Alert System.................................. 175
Driving...................................................... 286
cooling system.................................... 286
with the tailgate open......................... 287
with trailer........................................... 299
Driving in water........................................ 286
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 369
towing capacity.................................. 369
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 139
DVD ......................................................... 257
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 215
EcoGuide................................................. 121
Economical driving.................................. 286
ECO pressure.......................................... 318
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 123
Electrical socket...................................... 236
cargo area........................................... 296
front seat............................................. 236
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 319
Emergency puncture repair..................... 320
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 293
Engine
overheating......................................... 299
starting................................................ 112
11 Alphabetical Index
11
399
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 223
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 332
oil........................................................ 329
overview.............................................. 329
Engine drag control ................................ 138
Engine oil......................................... 329, 372
adverse driving conditions.................. 372
capacities........................................... 372
filter..................................................... 329
oil grade.............................................. 372
Engine specifications............................... 371
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 11
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156
Driver Alert Control............................. 178
LKA..................................................... 183
see Messages and symbols............... 156
Error messages in BLIS........................... 197
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 160
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 216
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 15
External dimensions................................ 368
F
Fan........................................................... 217
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 163, 172
First aid equipment.................................. 319
First aid kit .............................................. 319
Fluids, capacities..................................... 374
Fluids and oils.......................................... 374
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 92
Foot brake............................................... 129
Front seat
head restraint........................................ 81
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 11
Fuel.......................................................... 291
fuel consumption................................ 376
fuel economy...................................... 318
fuel filter.............................................. 292
Fuelling
fuel filler flap....................................... 289
fuel filler flap, locking............................ 57
Fuse box.................................................. 348
Fuses....................................................... 348
changing............................................. 348
engine compartment.......................... 349
general................................................ 348
under front right seat.......................... 355
under glovebox................................... 352
G
Gearbox................................................... 115
automatic............................................ 116
manual................................................ 115
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 118
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement................................................. 118
Geartronic................................................ 117
Glass
laminated/reinforced........................... 102
Glass roof, roller blind.............................. 106
Global opening........................................ 212
Glovebox................................................. 236
locking.................................................. 56
Gross vehicle weight............................... 369
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 115
11 Alphabetical Index
11
400
H
Handbrake............................................... 131
Hazard warning flashers............................ 92
Headlamp levelling.................................... 87
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 95
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights .......................... 96
Headlamps............................................... 335
head restraint
front seat............................................... 81
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 83
lowering................................................ 84
Heating.................................................... 218
rearview and door mirrors.................. 105
rear window........................................ 105
seats................................................... 217
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 102
High engine temperature......................... 299
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 100
HomeLink
.............................................. 132
Home safe lighting..................................... 95
Hoot........................................................... 86
Horn........................................................... 86
I
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 213
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 24
Ignition keys............................................... 79
Immobiliser................................................ 43
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 45
Inflatable curtain........................................ 24
Information button, PCC............................ 45
Information displays.................................. 69
Infotainment system ............................... 240
menus ................................................ 243
overview ............................................. 241
source buttons ................................... 241
voice control....................................... 275
Inlaid mats............................................... 236
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 87
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 66
right-hand drive.................................... 68
Instruments and controls........................... 66
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 93
Interior rearview mirror............................. 106
automatic dimming............................. 106
Intermittent wiping..................................... 99
iPod, connection................................... 261
J
Journey statistics..................................... 232
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 369
Key............................................................. 42
Key blade................................................... 46
Keyless drive...................................... 50, 112
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 50, 112
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 86, 145, 204, 241
Key positions............................................. 79
11 Alphabetical Index
11
401
L
Labels...................................................... 366
Laminated glass....................................... 102
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 335
Lane keeping assistant - LKA.................. 180
Laser sensor............................................ 164
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 359
Lighting.................................................... 335
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 91
approach light, duration................. 44, 95
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 94
bulbs, specifications........................... 340
controls................................................. 93
daytime running lights.......................... 88
display lighting...................................... 87
headlamp levelling................................ 87
home safe lighting................................ 95
in passenger compartment................... 93
instrument lighting................................ 87
main/dipped beam............................... 87
position/parking lamps......................... 92
rear fog lamp........................................ 92
tunnel detection.................................... 90
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 335
daytime running lights........................ 338
dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps)................................................. 336
direction indicators, front.................... 337
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)......................................... 337
main beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps)................................................. 337
position/parking lamps....................... 338
rear bulb holder: direction indicators,
brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 339
rear fog lamps..................................... 339
side marker lamps, front..................... 338
vanity mirror........................................ 340
Light switches............................................ 87
LKA - Lane keeping assistant.................. 180
Loading
cargo area........................................... 294
general................................................ 294
mounting points.................................. 295
roof load............................................. 294
Lock confirmation ..................................... 42
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 54
tailgate.................................................. 56
Locks
automatic locking................................. 54
locking.................................................. 54
unlocking.............................................. 54
Lubricants................................................ 374
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 374
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 87
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 89
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 359
Making calls............................................. 269
Manual gearbox....................................... 115
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 115
towing and recovery........................... 305
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 117
Max. roof load ......................................... 369
Media, Bluetooth
................................... 264
media player ........................................... 257
Memory function in seats.......................... 82
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 243
Menus/functions...................................... 205
11 Alphabetical Index
11
402
Menus and messages.............................. 200
Menu system MY CAR............................ 203
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 165, 173
Distance Alert..................................... 160
Driver Alert Control............................. 178
LKA..................................................... 183
Messages in BLIS.................................... 197
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 200
Messages in the information display....... 139
Meters
fuel gauge............................................. 70
speedometer......................................... 70
tachometer........................................... 70
Microphone.............................................. 267
Misting..................................................... 219
attending to the windows................... 212
condensation in headlamps............... 357
remove with the air vents................... 221
timer function...................................... 220
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 268
handsfree............................................ 267
register phone..................................... 268
voice control....................................... 275
Mood lighting............................................. 94
MY CAR................................................... 203
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 372
Oil level low.............................................. 329
Overheating............................................. 299
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 11
P
PACOS....................................................... 20
PACOS, switch.......................................... 20
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 361
damage and touch-up........................ 361
Panel lighting............................................. 87
Panic function............................................ 44
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 190
Parcel shelf.............................................. 298
Park assist camera.................................. 187
Parking assistance................................... 184
parking assistance sensors................ 186
Parking brake........................................... 131
Parking heater.......................................... 223
battery and fuel................................... 223
parking on a hill.................................. 223
time setting......................................... 225
Passenger compartment......................... 234
Passenger compartment filter................. 212
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 223
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic.............................................. 94
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 44
range............................................... 45, 46
Pedestrian protection.............................. 167
Petrol grade............................................. 291
Phone
connect............................................... 268
handsfree............................................ 267
incoming calls..................................... 269
making calls........................................ 269
phone book......................................... 271
11 Alphabetical Index
11
403
phone book, shortcut......................... 271
receiving a call.................................... 270
register phone..................................... 268
voice control....................................... 275
Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 190
Polishing.................................................. 358
Position/parking lamps.............................. 92
Power....................................................... 121
Power seat................................................. 82
Powershift gearbox.......................... 119, 305
Power windows....................................... 102
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 152
Queue Assistant....................................... 152
R
Radar sensor........................................... 147
limitations........................................... 154
Radio ...................................................... 250
AM/FM ............................................... 250
DAB ................................................... 254
Rain sensor................................................ 99
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 339
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 107
door.................................................... 104
electrically retractable......................... 105
heating................................................ 105
interior................................................. 106
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 105
Recirculation............................................ 220
Recommendations during driving............ 286
Recommended child seats, table.............. 32
Recovery.................................................. 307
Refrigerant............................................... 334
Refuelling........................................... 57, 289
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 289
refuelling............................................. 289
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 348
Remote control ....................................... 282
battery replacement ........................... 283
Remote control, HomeLink
programmable ................................... 132
Remote control key................................... 42
battery replacement.............................. 48
detachable key blade........................... 46
functions............................................... 44
range..................................................... 45
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 380
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 105
Resetting the power windows................. 104
Retractable power door mirrors............... 105
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 115
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 358
Road sign information............................. 141
Roller blind for glass roof......................... 106
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 369
Rustproofing............................................ 359
S
Safety mode.............................................. 28
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 81
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 16
seatbelt tensioner................................. 16
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 16
11 Alphabetical Index
11
404
Seatbelts.................................................... 14
Seats.......................................................... 81
head restraints, rear.............................. 83
heating................................................ 217
lowering the front backrest................... 81
lowering the rear backrest.................... 84
power seats.......................................... 82
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 295
Sensus....................................................... 77
Service position....................................... 341
Service programme................................. 328
Set time interval....................................... 158
Side airbags............................................... 22
Signal input, external....................... 241, 261
SIPS bags.................................................. 22
Soot filter................................................. 293
Soot filter full............................................ 293
Spare wheel............................................. 314
Speed limiter............................................ 143
Spin control............................................. 138
Spin control function............................... 138
Stability and traction control system....... 138
Stability system....................................... 138
Stains....................................................... 359
Start assistance....................................... 114
Steering force, speed related.................. 233
Steering force level, see Steering force... 233
Steering lock............................................ 113
Steering wheel........................................... 86
keypad.......................... 86, 145, 204, 241
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 149
steering wheel adjustment.................... 86
Stone chips and scratches...................... 361
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 234
Surround.......................................... 240, 245
Symbols................................................... 139
indicator symbols................................. 71
warning symbols................................... 71
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 165, 173
Distance Alert..................................... 160
Driver Alert Control............................. 178
LKA..................................................... 183
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking.................................. 56
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 212
Temperature control................................ 218
Timer........................................................ 220
Total airing function........................... 55, 212
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 302
detachable, removal .......................... 303
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 300
Towing..................................................... 305
towing eye.......................................... 306
Towing capacity....................................... 369
Towing equipment................................... 300
specifications...................................... 301
Towing eye.............................................. 306
Trailer....................................................... 299
cable................................................... 299
driving with a trailer............................ 299
snaking............................................... 304
Trailer stability assist .............................. 138
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 304
11 Alphabetical Index
11
405
Transmission............................................ 115
Transponder............................................ 102
Trip computer.......................................... 229
Trip meter.................................................. 75
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 155
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 138, 304
Tunnel detection........................................ 90
TV............................................................. 279
Type approval, remote control key sys-
tem........................................................... 380
Type designation..................................... 366
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 310
driving characteristics......................... 310
maintenance....................................... 310
pressure.............................................. 318
puncture repair................................... 320
specifications...................................... 312
speed ratings...................................... 313
tread wear indicators.......................... 311
winter tyres......................................... 312
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 55
from the outside................................... 54
USB, connection...................................... 261
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 94, 236
Ventilation................................................ 213
Vibration damper..................................... 300
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 275
Volvo Sensus............................................. 77
W
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 147
collision warning system.................... 169
stability and traction control system. . 138
Warning lamps
airbags SRS.......................................... 73
alternator not charging......................... 73
fault in brake system............................ 73
low oil pressure..................................... 73
parking brake applied........................... 73
seatbelt reminder.................................. 73
warning................................................. 73
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 169
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 17
Warning symbols....................................... 71
Warning triangle....................................... 319
Washer fluid, filling................................... 343
Washers
rear window........................................ 100
washer fluid, filling.............................. 343
windscreen......................................... 100
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 102
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 358
Waxing..................................................... 358
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 369
Wheels
changing............................................. 314
installation........................................... 316
rims..................................................... 311
snow chains........................................ 312
spare wheel........................................ 314
11 Alphabetical Index
11
406
Wheels and tyres..................................... 310
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 25
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 25
whiplash injury...................................... 25
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 102
Windscreen
Heating....................................... 105, 219
Windscreen washing................................ 100
Windscreen wipers.................................... 99
rain sensor............................................ 99
Winter driving........................................... 287
Winter tyres.............................................. 312
Wiper blades............................................ 341
changing............................................. 341
cleaning.............................................. 342
replacing, rear window....................... 342
service position................................... 341
Wipers and washing.................................. 99
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51&OHMJTI"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO
… 403 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Volvo-V40---2013
6

  • Kan de voorstoel van V 40 worden ingeklapt, zodat ik langere voorwerpen kan Vervoeren? Gesteld op 20-10-2020 om 09:53

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Verschillende portieren gaan de ene keer wel open de andere keer niet, alleen de bestuurdersdeur werkt altijd. Als ik van binnenuit de portieren vergrendel en weer ontgrendel dan werken ze weer. Wat kan de oorzaak zijn? Gesteld op 5-3-2020 om 18:05

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • pedestrian protection service required

    Dit bericht krijg ik sinds kort op mijn dashboard , bij het overschakelen voel ik nu enkele seconden kracht verlies .....
    Ik heb geen aanrijdingen gehad , kwam zomaar spontaan op ..
    wat kan je hier aan doen ? Gesteld op 20-1-2020 om 17:20

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • kijk naast de koppelingspedaal, helemaal links waar je voet op rust onder het matje, als je de kappen zijkant weghaalt kun je het zwarte matje weghalen dan zie je een aantal kabels, kijk of de stekker er goed in zit en of de kabels niet beschadigd zijn Geantwoord op 1-9-2020 om 17:21

    Waardeer dit antwoord (8) Misbruik melden

  • hoe stel ik de standkachel in op de sleutel van een volvo v40
    bvd Gesteld op 18-1-2020 om 16:23

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • hoe zet ik de spraakbegeleiding in navigatie aan en uit ? Gesteld op 14-1-2020 om 18:22

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Heeft de volvo v40 d2 2013 additief vloeistof voor roetfilter. Oftewel is er een aparte vloeistof voor het roetfilter nodig Gesteld op 6-12-2019 om 21:54

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
12

  • ik doe voor autocontrole marly roetfilter reiniger toe aan mijn diesel en altijd groene kaart
    gekregen Geantwoord op 13-12-2019 om 10:38

    Waardeer dit antwoord (1) Misbruik melden

  • Hoe kan ik de hoofdsteunen van de voorstoelen van mijn V40 jaargang 2000 verwijderen? Gesteld op 25-11-2019 om 12:25

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Hallo ik heb een Volvo v40 van het jaar 2015 ,de vraag is,is het normaal dat er maar 1mistachterlicht brand Gesteld op 8-2-2019 om 20:05

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Een goede garage zorgt dat er maar 1 mistlicht links werkt. Anders lijkt het teveel op remlichten. Geantwoord op 28-4-2019 om 16:11

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • ik wil de plastic van de pinker in de rechter buitenspiegel van mijn volvo v40 vervangen ....hoe kan ik de spiegel open doen ? Gesteld op 7-1-2019 om 20:11

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Normaal kun je de plastiek, achterkant van de spiegel aftrekken zonder de spiegel open te doen, is bij mij wel zo gelukt Mvg Geantwoord op 7-1-2019 om 20:37

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Hoe kan ik een update van Europa in mijn navigatiesysteem updaten? Gesteld op 24-12-2018 om 21:47

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Volgens mij moet je daarvoor cd's bij de dealer bemachtigen, het zijn er dacht ik vijf, die moet je dan in de cd speler afspelen waardoor je navigatiesysteem update Geantwoord op 24-12-2018 om 23:54

      Waardeer dit antwoord (1) Misbruik melden

  • U moet eerst door de dealer eeo software update laten doen, dat kost ongeveer 60 euro, daarna kunt u op
    Klik op deze LINK
    De kaart updates naar een usb stick downloaden en via het infotainment systeem uploaden naar de v40.

    Groet,

    hvdnb
    Geantwoord op 25-12-2018 om 06:38

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • hoe kan ik de rechter achterdeur openen, deze opent nu helemaal niet meer maar is reeds de derde keer dat dit voorvalt? Gesteld op 27-1-2018 om 10:43

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Daar heb ik ook een paar keer last van gehad. Een paar keer kinderslot uit en aan zetten, de hele auto sluiten en de sloten weer openen, daarna op slot en de hele nacht laten staan zorgde er voor dat de volgende dag alles weer werkte. Niet echt een oplossing maar de deur gaat wel weer open. Geantwoord op 27-1-2018 om 11:32

      Waardeer dit antwoord (16) Misbruik melden

  • Als ik muziek van men USB stick wil afspelen , dan krijg ik het eerst liedje te horen , daarna lees ik een melding met : kan het bestand niet afspelen.
    Haal ik de USB eruit en stop ik em erweer in, dan speelt ie helemaal niks als weer melding van kan apparaat of track niet lezen

    Kan er mij iemand helpen met dit probleem. Gesteld op 27-6-2016 om 09:13

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
18
24

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo V40 - 2013 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo V40 - 2013 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 11,24 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo V40 - 2013

Volvo V40 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 426 pagina's

Volvo V40 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 436 pagina's

Volvo V40 - 2013 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 434 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info